OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System V100R003IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Issue Date 02 2009-06-15 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com
[email protected] Website: Email: Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Starting the T2000.......................................................................................................................1-1 1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000.............................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Starting the Computer............................................................................................................................1-3 1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server......................................................................................................................1-3 1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status.........................................................................................................1-4 1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................1-4 1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client...........................................................................................................................1-5 1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server...........................................................................................................1-6 1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer.................................................................................................................1-6 1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views...............................................................................................................1-7 1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology..................................................................................................................1-7 1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................1-8 2 Topology Management.............................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Topology Management Functions..........................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Topology Objects...................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NE...................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.4 Virtual NE..............................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.5 Fiber Types.............................................................................................................................................2-4 2.2 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................2-4 2.2.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method...........................................................................................2-5 2.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method..........................................................................................2-6 2.2.3 Creating Virtual NE...............................................................................................................................2-9 2.3 Configuring the NE Data...............................................................................................................................2-10 2.3.1 Uploading the NE Data........................................................................................................................2-10 2.3.2 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................2-11 2.4 Creating Fibers..............................................................................................................................................2-12 2.4.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio Links.....................................................................2-12 2.4.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link Table..................................................................................2-13 2.4.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber Links...........................................................2-14 2.4.4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link Table..........................................................................2-15 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Contents OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2.4.5 Creating DCN Communication Cable..................................................................................................2-16 2.5 Creating a Topology Subnet..........................................................................................................................2-17 2.6 Adjusting Topology Objects.........................................................................................................................2-17 2.6.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer Process........................................................................................2-18 2.6.2 Modifying the NM Name.....................................................................................................................2-19 2.6.3 Modifying the NE Name......................................................................................................................2-20 2.6.4 Modifying the NE ID...........................................................................................................................2-20 2.6.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE.....................................................................................................2-21 2.6.6 Adding Boards......................................................................................................................................2-22 2.6.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information.....................................................................................................2-23 2.6.8 Naming a Fiber/Cable..........................................................................................................................2-23 2.6.9 Copying Topology Objects..................................................................................................................2-24 2.6.10 Moving Topology Objects.................................................................................................................2-24 2.7 Deleting Topology Objects...........................................................................................................................2-25 2.7.1 Deleting Topology Subnets..................................................................................................................2-25 2.7.2 Deleting Fibers.....................................................................................................................................2-25 2.7.3 Deleting Boards....................................................................................................................................2-26 2.7.4 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................2-26 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis.....................................................................3-1 3.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Creating IF 1+1 Protection..............................................................................................................................3-4 3.3 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.........................................................................................................................3-8 3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.................................................................................3-11 3.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute..........................................................................................................3-16 3.6 Configuring the ATPC Function...................................................................................................................3-18 3.7 Creating an N+1 Protection Group................................................................................................................3-20 3.8 Creating REGs...............................................................................................................................................3-22 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis........................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Configuring the Ring MSP..............................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Creating Linear MSP.......................................................................................................................................4-5 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis........................................................5-1 5.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots .......................................................................................................5-3 5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services ................................................................................5-4 5.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services............................................................................................5-7 5.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services..................................................................5-11 5.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service........................................................................5-13 5.6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service................................................................................................5-14 5.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services........................................................................................5-15 5.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services........................................................................................5-19 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis..........................................................................6-1 6.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme......................................................................................................................6-2 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Contents 6.2 Configuring the Clock Sources.......................................................................................................................6-7 6.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources .....................................................................................................6-9 6.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output..............................................................................6-12 6.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................6-14 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis ...........................................................................................................................................................7-1 7.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................7-3 7.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services..............................................................................................7-3 7.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services...........................................................................................7-4 7.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services..................................................................................7-5 7.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services .............................................................................................7-5 7.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services.............................................................................7-5 7.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services..........................................................................7-6 7.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services........................................................................7-7 7.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)..................................................................................7-7 7.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................7-8 7.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................7-8 7.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-10 7.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................7-14 7.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services).............................................................................7-14 7.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-14 7.3.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-15 7.3.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-18 7.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-23 7.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)....................................................................7-23 7.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-24 7.4.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-24 7.4.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-27 7.4.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................7-32 7.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)...............................................................7-32 7.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-32 7.5.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-33 7.5.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-36 7.5.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-41 7.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)............................................................7-41 7.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................7-41 7.6.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-42 7.6.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................7-46 7.6.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................7-54 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis...........8-1 8.1 Configuration Flows........................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)......................................8-2 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Contents OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)........................................8-4 8.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................8-4 8.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................8-5 8.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)..........................................8-6 8.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)..........................................8-10 8.2.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................8-11 8.2.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................8-20 8.2.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board).........................................8-29 8.2.7 Configuring NE3..................................................................................................................................8-31 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)................................................................9-1 9.1 Configuring Ethernet Ports..............................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports......................................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board..............................................................................9-9 9.1.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames........................................................................................9-17 9.1.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth........................................................9-17 9.2 Creating Ethernet Services............................................................................................................................9-19 9.2.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service............................................................................................................9-19 9.2.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service......................................................................................................9-24 9.2.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge.............................................................................................9-29 9.2.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table..........................................................................................................9-31 9.2.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service...........................................................................................9-33 9.2.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service.......................................................................................................9-33 9.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services.............................................................................9-34 9.3.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services...............................................................................9-35 9.3.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service......................................................................9-35 9.4 Configuring the QoS.....................................................................................................................................9-36 9.4.1 Creating a Flow....................................................................................................................................9-37 9.4.2 Creating the CAR.................................................................................................................................9-39 9.4.3 Creating the CoS..................................................................................................................................9-42 9.4.4 Binding the CAR/CoS..........................................................................................................................9-44 9.4.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping..........................................................................................................9-45 9.4.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board..............................................................................................9-47 9.4.7 Modifying CAR Parameters.................................................................................................................9-48 9.4.8 Modifying CoS Parameters..................................................................................................................9-49 9.5 Creating a LAG.............................................................................................................................................9-50 9.6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature..................................................................................................9-58 9.6.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually ......................................................................9-59 9.6.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry............................................................9-60 9.6.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol ............................................................................................9-62 9.6.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol...........................................................................................9-66 9.6.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item......................................................................9-68 9.6.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function....................................................................9-69 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) ..................11-11 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes.......................................................11-2 11..10-15 10........................6....1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead.........................10-10 10..................................................................................................................................1 Configuring the Orderwire...........................1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces ........................................................................................3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports.............7.............................2 Service Planning...........................3 Configuration Process....6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services).........10-16 10....................................................................................3 Configuration Process........................................................10-20 10.........10-17 10..6.......................10-1 10........................................................................................................................................................................................ Ltd..............................................................................1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)............................................................................................4 Configuring External Alarms.............................................................................6........3 Configuration Process...........4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports.........................................................2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services...............................................................................................10-14 10......2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces ................10-13 10....................................4 Configuring VC-3 POHs......................................................................................................A-1 B Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................................................................2 Service Planning......11-1 11..............................................................................................................10-3 10..............5.............................10-21 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports ...........12-4 12...................................................................7........................................10-8 10.......................................................................................7 Configuration Example (External Alarms)..............................................2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)......................10-16 10.............1 Networking Diagram.............10-21 10..............................................................................................................................................................................................2 Configuring RSOHs.....................................................................13-2 13.......................................................................................................12-2 12........................................................................................................................................................1 Networking Diagram..B-1 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................5.........13-7 A Glossary.................................10-13 10........................................................11-3 11...................................................................................................................................................................................10-18 10......................................................................................................................................................10-20 10.............................................................................................12-2 12...............................................7.......................................................2 Service Planning................................5..............12-1 12...................11-6 11....................5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services).........................1 Networking Diagram..................10-6 10....................................................................12-10 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data............12-8 12.....13-1 13................ v ............5 Configuring VC-12 POHs......3 Configuring VC-4 POHs.........................................3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services.....................................................................9-70 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces.............................7 LPT Configuration..........................................................OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Contents 9......................................... . .....................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)........................................ Ltd...................................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports..........................................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................7-35 Figure 7-19 Networking diagram..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-42 Figure 7-21 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)......6-5 Figure 6-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line) .........................................................7-24 Figure 7-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)..............................................................................................7-27 Figure 7-14 Networking diagram............................................................................6-4 Figure 6-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line) .............................. vii ............................................................................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-5 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................................................7-33 Figure 7-16 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)................7-17 Figure 7-10 Networking diagram...................................................................................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-2 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters............................................................................................................................................7-43 Figure 7-22 Configuring Ethernet services...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-34 Figure 7-18 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................7-33 Figure 7-15 IDU board configuration (NE1)..........................................7-15 Figure 7-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................................................7-45 Figure 8-1 Networking diagram.....................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network...............7-16 Figure 7-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services................6-7 Figure 7-1 Networking diagram.........................7-42 Figure 7-20 IDU board configuration (NE1)...............8-6 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................5-3 Figure 5-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme ...........7-43 Figure 7-23 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services............................................................................................................................................................................7-8 Figure 7-2 IDU board configuration .................................................................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-12 Configuring Ethernet services.............................................................7-34 Figure 7-17 Configuring Ethernet services...........................................................7-16 Figure 7-8 Configuring Ethernet services.............................................................................7-8 Figure 7-3 Configuring Ethernet services............................................................................................................OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figures Figures Figure 5-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order...........................5-4 Figure 6-1 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network.............................................................................................................................................................. .....................10-14 Figure 10-3 Networking diagram............ Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .....................................................................10-17 Figure 10-4 Timeslot allocation diagram .Figures OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 8-3 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3.10-18 Figure 10-5 Networking diagram...............................................................................................10-21 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co........................................................................................................8-10 Figure 10-1 Networking diagram.............................................................................................. Ltd...............................................................10-14 Figure 10-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services................................................................................................................ .........................................................................7-45 Table 8-1 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board...... Ltd.......................................................................................................................7-16 Table 7-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.............................................................7-6 Table 7-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports... 8-7 Table 8-4 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board............7-26 Table 7-14 Parameters of external Ethernet ports......................................................................7-25 Table 7-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.....................8-10 Table 8-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports...............................................3-3 Table 3-2 Configuring a Hybrid radio link.........................................................................................7-34 Table 7-15 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............7-3 Table 7-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services..........................................................................................................................................8-4 Table 8-3 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board.........................................................7-17 Table 7-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports...8-7 Table 8-6 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2)......................................................................................................................................................7-26 Table 7-13 Parameters of EPL services........................................................................................................................................... 7-4 Table 7-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services........................................................................................................8-11 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........8-7 Table 8-5 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1)................................................8-8 Table 8-7 Flow configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-10 Parameters of the link aggregation group....... ix ........................................................................7-17 Table 7-10 Parameters of EPL services............................................................................. 8-2 Table 8-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board...........................................................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-9 Parameters of the CoS.......................................................................................1d bridge-based EPLAN services.........................................................................................8-8 Table 8-8 Parameters of the CARa..........................................7-35 Table 7-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-43 Table 7-18 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.....................................7-6 Table 7-5 Flow for configuring 802............................................6-14 Table 7-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards...................................................................OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Tables Tables Table 3-1 Configuring SDH/PDH radio links..................................7-5 Table 7-4 Flow for configuring 802...................................................................... 7-9 Table 7-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...........................................7-9 Table 7-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports...................................................................................3-4 Table 6-1 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters.............................................7-34 Table 7-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services................................................................7-44 Table 7-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services.............................................................................................................1q bridge-based EVPLAN services............................................................................................................................................................................. ...........13-9 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................................................13-5 Table 13-4 Task collection (clock)...........................................10-14 Table 10-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services........................................................................ Ltd.............................................................................. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) ...............10-21 Table 13-1 Task collection (NE attributes)......13-6 Table 13-5 Task collection (orderwire)........................9-72 Table 9-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................................................................................................................................................10-17 Table 10-3 Configuration of the external alarms...............................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-13 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)............Tables OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Table 8-12 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2).13-2 Table 13-2 Task collection (radio link)......................................................................................................9-16 Table 9-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................13-7 Table 13-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave)...................................................................................................8-11 Table 9-1 Methods used by ports to process data frames........13-7 Table 13-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave)................................................................................................9-8 Table 9-2 Methods used by ports to process data frames...........................................................................13-3 Table 13-3 Task collection (services)........................................................................................................................................................................9-73 Table 10-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port......................................................... . Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. you should be familiar with the following information: l l l Radio communication basics. It can help the readers to easily grasp the method for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 and thus to complete all the actual configuration tasks. Product Name OptiX RTN 600 OptiX iManager T2000 Version V100R003 V200R007C03 Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are: l l Installation/Commissioning engineers Data configuration engineers Before reading this document.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) About This Document About This Document Purpose This document uses examples to describe the entire process of the initial configuration of the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 610/620 by using the T2000. 1 . especially the basics of network planning Basic functions and slots that are configured to house the boards of the OptiX RTN 600 Basic operations of the T2000 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. This topic describes common Ethernet configuration tasks. This topic describes how to configure the overhead byte.About This Document OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Organization This document is organized as follows. This topic describes how to configure the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.. on the Per-NE Basis 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data A Glossary This topic describes how to configure the MSP on an NE. This topic describes how to configure the Ethernet service based on the hybrid microwave on an NE. This topic describes how to supplement and adjust the initially configured data in the equipment commissioning and operating stage. This topic describes how to configure the clock on an NE. This topic describes how to configure the interface parameters of the board. This topic describes how to manage NEs and optical fibers/ cables through the T2000 after creating their topologies on the T2000. This topic describes how to configure the Ethernet service based on the SDH/PDH microwave on an NE. Ltd. 2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3 Configuring Radio Links This topic describes how to configure the radio link on an NE. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Topic 1 Starting the T2000 2 Topology Management Description This topic describes how to use the quick start of the T2000 to know basic operations on the T2000. This topic describes how to configure the SDH/PDH service on an NE. This topic lists the terms used in this document. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk. For example. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. which if not avoided. data loss. log in as user root.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) About This Document Topic B Acronyms and Abbreviations Description This topic lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document. Book titles are in italics. which if not avoided. folders. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. and users are in boldface. performance degradation. Ltd. could result in equipment damage. 3 . or unexpected results. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation. could result in minor or moderate injury. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Names of files.. directories. which if not avoided. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Therefore. Known defects are fixed. choose File > Create > Folder. Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Updates in Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Second formal release. Mouse Operation The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. For example. menus. The configuration of the 1588 clock overhead byte is described. Ltd. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons. For example. Updates in Issue 01 (2009-04-25) Initial formal release. and dialog titles are in boldface. tabs. the latest document issue contains all updates made to previous issues. click OK. parameters.. windows.About This Document OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. 1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000 The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views The T2000 common views include Main Topology and NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 1. Ltd. 1-1 . 1. troublefree launch of the T2000. you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1 Starting the T2000 1 About This Chapter Starting the T2000 The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth. So. in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000. You can use these views to manage the topology. equipment. 1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Start the computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .4 Logging In to the T2000 Client You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client. 1. 1. when the computer becomes faulty.1 Starting the T2000 OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1.7 Shutting Down the Computer Normally. in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required. you can use the System Monitor Client to shut down the T2000 server. Stop the T2000 server. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC.1. Start the T2000 server. or when upgrading the version. In special situations. you must exit the T2000 client. for example. Ltd. do not perform this operation.1. 1. Shut down the computer. 1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network. you need to start the T2000 server.1. shut down the computer in the correct sequence. refer to the procedure provided to start the computer. you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure.5 Exiting a T2000 Client Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server. Exit the T2000 client. Start the T2000 client. So. 2. In special circumstances.1.1 Starting the Computer To avoid computer damage or data loss. do not shut down the computer. 1. for example. 3. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required. 1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000 The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty. Context l Start the computer and the T2000 application in the following steps: 1.. 2.1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server After starting the computer. 3.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server When the T2000 server is managing the system normally. l Shut down the T2000 application and the computer in the following steps: 1.1. 1. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. The T2000 license must be in the server directory. To learn about the recommended hardware configuration. The SQL Server must be started and work normally. 2. modem and other peripherals. For example. 4. Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window. User: t2000 (by default). For example. data line and Ethernet line must be connected correctly. refer to the procedure provided to start the computer. If there is printer. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network.. modem or other peripherals. the power cable of the monitor. l Background Information The T2000 can run in the UNIX or Windows operating system. Prerequisite l l l l The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1 Starting the T2000 1. The power cable of the workstation or the computer. 4. ----End Power on the printer. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. you need to start the T2000 server. Password: t2000 (by default). On Windows 1.1. refer to the OptiX iManager T2000 Product Description. Password: t2000 (by default). Power on the workstation and the Solaris is automatically started. Click OK to open the Windows user interface. Procedure l On UNIX 1. Power on the printer. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required. The functions are the same in each operating system. Ltd. The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly. User: t2000 (by default).1 Starting the Computer To avoid computer damage or data loss. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l The T2000 must be installed correctly. l 1. 2.1. 1-3 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 3. their power line and data line must be connected correctly. modem and other peripherals. Power on the computer and the Windows is automatically started. 3. The Prompt dialog box is displayed.2 Starting the T2000 Server After starting the computer. ----End 1. When the core processes and Database Server Process processes are in the Running state. Syslog Agent. you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty. View the status of T2000 core processes (including Ems Server. Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process. ----End 1. Northbound Interface Module (SNMP) Process. Step 5 Optional: If the System Monitor is started. Client Upgrader and Toolkit Server). Client Upgrader and Toolkit Server) and Database Server Process are in the Running state. Background Information To view the status of the T2000 processes by UNIX command line. User Name: admin. Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. Topo Server. Database Server Process and Northbound Interface processes (including Northbound Interface Module(iPASSAgent) Process. Notify Service and itnotify) manually.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client. you need use it to restart the T2000 server when needed. For example. Schedulesrv Server. Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user. Step 3 Click Login to display the System Monitor window. run the following command: # /T2000/server/bin/showt2000server If each process entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change. Tomcat Service. WebLCT Server. Step 4 Optional: When needed.1. Wait until the core processes (including Ems Server. Now the T2000 server is started successfully. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . NOTE Periodically change the password and memorize it. the T2000 processes are normal. Step 2 In the Login dialog box. Naming Service. Naming Service. Notify Service and itnotify).4 Logging In to the T2000 Client You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client. Topo Server..) and Server: Local. Procedure Step 1 In the System Monitor. click the Process tab. you can also start the Northbound Interface precesses (including Northbound Interface Module(iPASSAgent) Process.1 Starting the T2000 OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server. Schedulesrv Server. Security Server. the T2000 server is started properly. Password and Server.1. 1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WebLCT Server. Syslog Agent. Tomcat Service. enterUser Name. All the processes should be in the Running state. Security Server. Ltd. Click OK to complete adding a server. you need to immediately change this password. Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Procedure Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client. Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu. Mode and Server Name. Click OK to complete the server settings. you must exit the T2000 client. Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000. Otherwise. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Password of the T2000 client. The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). After the Mode is specified. To protect the T2000 from unauthorized logins. l 4. The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. You need not enter the Port number. 5. 1. Click New to display another Setting dialog box. 1-5 . double-click the T2000 Client icon on the desktop. the client cannot log in to the server. For example. User Name: admin. the communication between the client and the server is encrypted. and the password is T2000. specify the IP Address. Click to display the Setting dialog box. Step 2 Enter the User Name.5 Exiting a T2000 Client Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server. 2. When you choose the Security (SSL) mode. In the Setting dialog box. To view the communication mode of the server. choose System > Communication Security Setting on the Main Menu of the System Monitor client. 3. The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups. Ltd. NOTE l l By default. Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters. the system selects a Port number automatically. the initial user name is admin.1. Prerequisite The T2000 client must be started normally. Password: T2000.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1 Starting the T2000 Prerequisite The T2000 server must be started correctly. NOTE l l l The IP address is the IP address used by the T2000 server. ----End 1. restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade. l In the System Monitor. automatically exit the client. for example. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.1. you need to shut down the T2000 server first. 1. NOTE Shut down the T2000 server only. NOTE After shutdown. when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides. 2. installing patches and re-installing the T2000). In special situations. choose System > Stop Server from the Main Menu. do not shut down the computer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . you can perform the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database.7 Shutting Down the Computer Normally. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 server in the way of shutting down the T2000 server and the System Monitor Client. Procedure l Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor. when the computer becomes faulty. restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade. In special circumstances..1 Starting the T2000 NOTE OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) If the layout of the view is changed and not saved. ----End 1. choose System > Shutdown System from the Main Menu. for example.1. 1. restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade. Prerequisite The T2000 server and client applications must be stopped. do not perform this operation. shut down the computer in the correct sequence. you cannot perform the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database. ----End In the System Monitor. After you confirm the dialog box.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server When the T2000 server is managing the system normally. installing patches and re-installing the T2000). Context When performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database. installing patches and re-installing the T2000). Prerequisite All the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. you can use the System Monitor Client to shut down the T2000 server. theT2000server is stopped normally. Ltd. 1. When all the processes are in the Stopped status. 1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Confirm dialog box appears asking you whether to save the changes. After shutdown. or when upgrading the version. sync. You can use these views to manage the topology..2. for example.2 Opening the NE Explorer The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station.1 Opening the Main Topology After opening the Main Topology.2. you can manage the network topology. the last command is # shutdown -y -g0 -i6. you can manage the network topology. creating a topology object. manage and maintain each NE.1 Opening the Main Topology After opening the Main Topology.sync. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop. 1. 1. 1-7 . To restart the Sun workstation. creating a topology object. If the password is changed. 2. enter the new password. l 1. The computer shuts down automatically. 3.2. board or port in a hierarchical manner. On Windows platform 1. creating a subnet. and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology.sync # shutdown -y -g0 -i5 NOTE l l rootkit is the default password of super user root. perform the following step one by one to shut down the workstation. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.sync. Procedure l On UNIX platform 1. Ltd. for example. equipment. ----End Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views The T2000 common views include Main Topology and NE Explorer. creating a subnet. 2. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. After opening the NE Explorer. you can configure. and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment. Enter the following commands in the terminal window.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1 Starting the T2000 Precaution CAUTION To avoid equipment damages or data loss. the UNIX workstation shuts down automatically: % su root Password: rootkit # sync. After opening the NE Explorer. Procedure l Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.2. Background Information You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . ----End 1. you can configure.1 Starting the T2000 OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher. manage and maintain each NE. board or port in a hierarchical manner. Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu. Procedure l l To open the Main Topology. Ltd. ----End 1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Opening the NE Explorer The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. log in to the T2000. 2-1 . 2.2 Creating NEs Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000.1 Basic Concepts Topology structure helps you to learn the layout of the entire network. adjust the optical NE source.5 Creating a Topology Subnet The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. you need to create the fibers first. during deployment. you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. you need to delete some objects of the topology. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. modify the status of the preconfigured NE and so on. An understanding of basic topology concepts facilitates the topology management.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management 2 About This Chapter Topology Management You can manage NEs and fibers through the T2000 after creating their topologies on the T2000. it is not configured. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes. Ltd. generally. 2. For example. for example. and the networking and running information of the equipment. it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one. it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE..7 Deleting Topology Objects When adjusting the network topology. 2. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create only a few NEs. 2.3 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created. you can allocate them in one topology subnet. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment. 2. When you need to create a large number of NEs. 2. 2.4 Creating Fibers To implement the end-to-end service management on the NMS.6 Adjusting Topology Objects You can modify the settings when creating the network topology by using the T2000. 2. Present topology object types with different icons. board. you can set up and manage the entire network topology to present the networking and the status of the devices. Topology management allows you to perform the following operations: l l l l l Customize the view. Add. Adjust the size of a topology view for convenient viewing. You can obtain the location information on a device node through the location of the corresponding icon in the background. 2. paste. Set the background. Ethernet cables. Switch between views quickly through the navigation tree. small icons are used to indicate the topology object status.4 Virtual NE An virtual NE is an abstraction of an NE or a network that cannot be directly managed by the T2000. or paste subnets. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Topology Objects Topology object refers to an operation object corresponding to the physical equipment. 2. modify.1. such as the link status.1.1 Topology Management Functions By topology management. An understanding of basic topology concepts facilitates the topology management. delete. 2. you must first create its topology. For example. and virtual fiber/cable in a centralized manner. The other NEs that communicate with the T2000 through the GNE are called non-gateway NEs. You can define and organize different views as required. You can browse the topology view to know and monitor the entire network status in real time. or fiber/cable on the T2000.1. cut. and the networking and running information of the equipment. you can set up and manage the entire network topology to present the networking and the status of the devices.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NE The T2000 communicates with the NEs through the network to manage the network equipment. copy.1. delete.. 2. modify. Ltd. 2. You can browse the topology view to know and monitor the entire network status in real time. If you want to manage an NE. Search for a topology object globally to help the user identify the topology object.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2.1 Topology Management Functions By topology management.1.5 Fiber Types You can use the T2000 to manage fibers. or cut topology nodes. Virtual NEs represent the topological relations between the equipment that the T2000 manages directly and the equipment the T2000 manages indirectly on the topology. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) l l l 2-2 .1. you can create a virtual NE on the T2000 to represent the equipment. This type of NE that communicates directly with the T2000 through the network is called gateway NE (GNE). Add.1 Basic Concepts Topology structure helps you to learn the layout of the entire network. DCN communication cables. radio links. If the equipment that is not managed by the T2000 exists in the network and there are trails created on the equipment. the equipment that is not managed by the T2000. The other NEs that communicate with the T2000 through the GNE are called non-gateway NEs. Different from actual NEs. microwave link.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 2 Topology Management Manage the topology with the auxiliary tools such as the aerial view. On the T2000. This type of NE that communicates directly with the T2000 through the network is called gateway NE (GNE). GNE The GNE communicates with the T2000 by using the communication protocol. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Do not connect more than 60 non-gateway NEs to a GNE.1.2 Topology Objects Topology object refers to an operation object corresponding to the physical equipment. The T2000 is able to manage the following topologies. It can be used to represent any unknown equipment. NOTE If the number of non-gateway NEs that connect to a GNE is more than 50. Based on all these topologies. serial port cable. Non-gateway NE The non-gateway NE communicates with the GNE by using the ECC or the extended ECC. and cannot be managed physically through their topologies. which are NE. board. 2-3 . for example. or fiber/cable on the T2000. 2. and extended ECC. If the equipment that is not managed by the T2000 exists in the network and there are trails created on the equipment.3 GNE and Non-Gateway NE The T2000 communicates with the NEs through the network to manage the network equipment. 2. Virtual NEs represent the topological relations between the equipment that the T2000 manages directly and the equipment the T2000 manages indirectly on the topology. the NE and board configuration on the T2000 are directly sent to physical NEs. print. After that.1. the topology in the T2000 has the same data as the physical equipment. When the NE data are uploaded to the T2000. you can create a virtual NE on the T2000 to represent the equipment. By creating topologies. you must first create its topology. an alarm is reported on the T2000. the T2000 sets up the communication with physical equipment in the network. subnet. virtual fiber. The recommended number of non-gateway NEs (including non-gateway NEs that connects to the GNE by using the extended ECC) that connect to each GNE is fewer than 50. The T2000 manages the network through GNEs. Ethernet cable and serial port cable are only logical concepts on the T2000.1. Ltd. 2. the T2000 can query the data or working status of corresponding objects in the physical network. port.. a virtual NE does not need to be hardware-specific. Ethernet cable. The subnet. Each T2000 must connect to at least one GNE.4 Virtual NE An virtual NE is an abstraction of an NE or a network that cannot be directly managed by the T2000. such as the third-party equipment. If you want to manage an NE. fiber. it is usually used to simulate the equipment that cannot be directly managed by the T2000. channel. and filter. board. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. The process of creating and deleting a virtual NE is similar to that of an actual NE..1. The concept of virtual NE just for the SDH equipment. The license does not define the maximum number of virtual NEs on the T2000. or even one or more complete networks. 2. It may contains several physical fibers.652. the IP address range of the gateway NE.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) You can configure boards for a virtual NE on the T2000.653.2.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The T2000 can search all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE. DCN Communication Cable A DCN communication cable is used to connect communication interfaces of different equipment and to provide an extra transmission channel at the physical layer for the management information. or the NSAP address.5 Fiber Types You can use the T2000 to manage fibers. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment. DCN communication cables. radio links. G.654. for example. the T2000 classifies the fiber as four types. and G. Ethernet cables. Radio Link A radio link uses the microwave to connect different outdoor units of radio equipment. When you need to create a large number of NEs. Virtual NEs are not restricted by the license. 2. radio links. Ethernet Cable The Ethernet cable that the T2000 can manage is used to connect the communication interface of the gateway NE and the T2000 server. which are G. it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. and virtual fiber/cable in a centralized manner. According to the physical feature of a fiber. G. during deployment. 655 fibers. 2. it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one. In 2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. When you need to create only a few NEs. Fiber A fiber is used to connect the optical interfaces between different equipment and to provide a transmission channel at the physical layer for service signals.2 Creating NEs Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Virtual Fiber/Cable Virtual fiber/cable is a logical concept. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. this method is faster and more reliable. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The system displays the Input Search Domain dialog box. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Optional: Add a search domain.2. 2. That is. the T2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. 1. this method is faster and more reliable. l Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Search for NE from the Main Menu. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs. Ltd. 2-5 . In addition. 2. Select an address type and enter the search address. does not allow creating NEs in batches. 2. unlike the search method. 2. The manual method.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method You can only create NEs one by one through the manual method. Click Add. you must create virtual NEs so that the T2000 manages them together with the regular NEs in a uniform manner.3 Creating Virtual NE To display the topological relations between the equipment that is directly managed by the T2000 and the equipment that is indirectly managed by the T2000 on the topology.2.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management addition. the T2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Prerequisite l l The user must log in to the T2000. The NE to be created must have normal communication with the T2000.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The T2000 can search all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE. the IP address range of the gateway NE. or the NSAP address.2.. ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the T2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the T2000 and related routers. and Remarks. Step 5 Create NEs. l l Procedure Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device.2 Topology Management NOTE OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l l When Address type is set to NSAP Address. 5. The NE to be created must have normal communication with the T2000. Extended ID. the Result list displays all the NEs that are found. the gateway NE to which the NE to be created belongs must be created. If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE. Select Search for NE. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. and the T2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Name. Click OK. Step 4 Click Start. 4. 2. 1. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method You can only create NEs one by one through the manual method. That is. 3.2. Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 5 to create other NEs that are not created. Click OK. The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology. does not allow creating NEs in batches. Click Create.. ----End 2. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. click OK. The system displays the Add Object dialog box. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE. Ltd. The manual method. Prerequisite l l The user must log in to the T2000. unlike the search method. The system displays the Create dialog box. Step 3 Complete the following information: ID. After the search ends. When Address type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. 3. Step 3 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to add several search domains. Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree. The Search for NE dialog box is displayed. 2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Specify User Name and Password. ensure that the T2000 is installed with the OSI protocol stack software. .. The Gateway Type parameter is set to Non... 2-7 .Select the gateway to which the NE belongs. If .. Enter the NSAP Address of the NE.. Proceed to the next step. If . If the Protocol parameter is set to IP If the Protocol parameter is set to OSI Then . The Gateway Type parameter is set to Gateway Then .. Gateway and go to Step 6.. Ltd. Enter the IP Address of the NE. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Step 4 Set the Gateway Type parameter for the NE. Step 5 Specify the protocol and IP address that the NE uses. The default user name is root and the default password is password. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Extended ID 1 to 254 9 Name - - 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Generally. Ltd. ----End Parameters Parameter ID Value Range 1 to 49135 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the basic ID of the NE to be created. The Name of each NE must be unique. Step 7 Click OK. The NE ID that consists of the basic ID and extended ID is the identifier of the NE on the T2000. It is recommended that you set Name to a character string that includes the location of the NE. This parameter specifies the extended ID of the NE to be created. or other information. the ID of the NE.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 6 Specify NE User and Password. the extended ID is set to 9. Step 8 Click the Main Topology. The icon of the NE is displayed at the cursor position. OSI IP When Gateway Type is set to Gateway. This parameter specifies the NSAP address of the NE to be created. If the NE to be created can function as a gateway NE or a non-gateway NE. you need to set this parameter. NonGateway Default Value Non-Gateway Description l If the NE to be created is a gateway NE. 2-9 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 2. In the case of other situations. ensure that the T2000 is installed with the OSI protocol stack software.2. set this parameter to IP. set Gateway Type to Gateway. If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE. you must create virtual NEs so that the T2000 manages them together with the regular NEs in a uniform manner. You only need to set the area ID. l l Affiliated Gateway - - When Gateway Type is set to NonGateway. When the OSI over DCC solution is applied. When Protocol is set to OSI. ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the T2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the T2000 and related routers. set Gateway Type to NonGateway. Prerequisite l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.. and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Parameter Gateway Type Value Range Gateway. When Protocol is set to IP. and the T2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment. l l IP Address - - This parameter specifies the IP address of the NE to be created. NSAP Address - - NOTE l l When Protocol is set to OSI. set this parameter to OSI.3 Creating Virtual NE To display the topological relations between the equipment that is directly managed by the T2000 and the equipment that is indirectly managed by the T2000 on the topology. When Protocol is set to IP. you need to set this parameter. you need to set this parameter. Ltd. l Protocol IP. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set Gateway Type according to the planning information for the DCN. set the gateway NE to which the NE to be created belongs. Name. alarm data. Step 2 Choose Upload and click Next. alarm data. The NE must be created successfully. Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. 2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 3 Enter the ID. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE. Ltd. Step 2 Choose NE > SDH Series > Virtual NE from the Object Tree. Step 4 Click OK. it is not configured. Context Procedure Step 1 Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .3. ----End 2. the NE data is configured by uploading the NE data. 2.3. and performance data to the NMS. The Add Object dialog box is displayed. the NE data is configured by uploading the NE data.3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading is completed. and performance data to the NMS. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.2 Configuring the NE Data Manually You need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. 2.1 Uploading the NE Data Generally. and Remarks of the NE. Uploading the NE data involves uploading the NE-side configurations.1 Uploading the NE Data Generally. Then click the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. The NE icon is displayed at the spot where you clicked the mouse button. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the shortcut menu. Uploading the NE data involves uploading the NE-side configurations.2 Topology Management l OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Applies to the SDH equipment. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the upload may take a long time. 2.3 Configuring the NE Data Though an NE is successfully created. The operation clears original service data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs. . The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed. the communications between the NEs and the T2000 may be interrupted and the subsequent procedures of manually configuring the NE data cannot be performed. Step 6 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE. Ltd. ----End 2. Background Information When you manually configure the NE data. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration interrupts the service on the NE. Therefore. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Step 4 Click Close. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side. The NE must be created successfully. Step 2 Choose Manual Configuration and click Next. this operation is used for configuring gateway NEs for the first time. NE Remarks and Subrack Type and then click Next. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2-11 . Step 5 Set NE Name.3. Step 3 Click OK. The NE slot window is displayed.2 Configuring the NE Data Manually You need to manually configure the NE data during initialization. In the case of the RTN NEs. The operation clears original service data from NEs and then deliver the new configuration data to NEs. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to configure. Equipment Type. Step 4 Click OK. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. the original service data is cleared from the NEs. the NMS can obtain the information about the radio link to which the specified IF interface is connected. After the successful verification.5 Creating DCN Communication Cable The T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. 2. NOTE The Query Logical Information and Query Physical Information operations cannot be performed for a preconfigured NE. This method is often used when the fiber link is not physically connected. The NEs also communicate with each other through the extended ECC.4.4. the search-and-create method is used to create radio links. and thus can create the radio link quickly. Generally. and thus can create the radio link quickly. NOTE Verification is to run the verification command. 2. the NMS can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links. and thus can create the fiber link quickly. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed. the search-and-create method is used to create fiber links. ----End 2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 2-12 . The IF board for each NE must be created on the T2000. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to create the fibers first. 2.4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link Table After you manually fill in the table. Generally.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber Links By searching for a fiber link. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.4. the NMS can obtain the information about the radio link to which the specified IF interface is connected.. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window. Ltd. the NEs start to work normally. 2. Generally. the NMS can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links. different types of cables can be created on the T2000. the NMS can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link Table After you manually fill in the table. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to NEs and the basic configuration of the NEs is complete. 2.4. 2.4. Step 8 Right-click on the slot to add a board.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 7 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE. the search-and-create method is used to create radio links.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio Links By searching for a radio link. Depending on the communication mode.4. Step 9 Choose Verify and Run as required and click Finish.4 Creating Fibers To implement the end-to-end service management on the NMS.1 Creating Radio Links by Searching for the Radio Links By searching for a radio link. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Step 5 In the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. select IF interfaces for one or multiple radio NEs. the radio links that conflict with the selected ones are automatically displayed in the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. ----End Subsequent Handling When the information about the radio link that is created through search is incomplete. refer to Step 5 to delete the conflicting radio links before the creation. telling that the search domain is empty. If you check this check box and if all the selected ports radio links are created. The boards to be connected with radio links must be created. NOTE l l l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box. the system prompts No fiber to create. NOTE l When you select one or multiple radio links in the Newly Searched Fiber list.2 Creating Radio Links by Filling the Link Table After you manually fill in the table. a dialog box is displayed. Click Search. Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu. In this case. Step 4 In the Newly Searched Fiber list. a dialog box is displayed after the search is complete. Click Close. if the selected links are all in the Already created state. select one or multiple conflicting radio links (the Conflict with logical link (Y/N) value of which in the Misconnected Fiber list is displayed as Yes). the system does not search for the ports at which radio links are already created. 2. During the creation of radio links. Step 3 After the search is complete. telling that the operation was successful. The links that transmit radio signals are called radio links. Click Create Fiber/ Cable. do not check this check box. A progress bar is displayed. Click Delete Fiber/Cable. you can supplement the information about the radio link by modifying the fiber/cable information. This operation is often used when actual radio link is not formed. Ltd. Step 2 In the left-hand pane. 2-13 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. select one or multiple radio links. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. the NMS can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links.4. If you need to check consistency between the created radio links and the actual radio links.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Context The radio frequency wireless signals within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHz are called radio signals. Generally. and thus can create the fiber link quickly. Step 8 Click OK. the search-and-create method is used to create fiber links. Step 6 Select the sink board and port in the Select the sink end of the link dialog box. Ltd.3 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Searching the SDH Fiber Links By searching for a fiber link.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Context Usually. The created radio link appears between the source and sink NEs on the Main Topology. Procedure Step 1 Click the + sign. TIP When selecting the wrong source or sink NE. right-click and click OK in the Object Selection dialog box to exit.4. ----End 2. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Microwave Link dialog box. Step 7 Click OK.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 2-14 . Step 3 Select the source board and port in the Select the source end of the link dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Click the sink NE of the radio link on the Main Topology. shortcut icon on the toolbar of the Main Topology and the cursor changes to a Step 2 Click the source NE of the radio link on the Main Topology. The optical interfaces of every NE must be connected using fibers. the NMS can obtain the information about the fiber link to which the specified optical interface is connected. the radio frequency wireless signal within the frequency range of 300 MHz to 300 GHz is called a radio signal. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. Step 4 Click OK and the cursor changes to a + sign. The link that transmits radio signals is called a radio link. 4 Creating SDH Fiber Links by Filling the Link Table After you manually fill in the table. When a fiber between two SDH NEs passes through a WDM NE. Ltd. If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box. Click Close. the system displays a message indicating that the search field is null. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE l When one or more fibers are selected in the Newly Searched Fiber list. l Step 5 To delete the conflicting fibers. the NMS can create radio links according to the configuration information about the links.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 2 Topology Management The boards of every NE must be created on the T2000. are shown in the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. delete the conflicting fibers on the T2000 before you start creating fibers. from the Existing Conflicting Fiber list select one or more fibers whose values are Yes for the Existing Conflicting link (Y/N) parameter in the Misconnected Fiber list. 2-15 . Context l If conflicting fibers are found during the creation. A progress bar is displayed showing the progress of the search. the system displays the message as follows: No fiber to create. Step 3 A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. if all the selected fibers are in the Already created state. But when the fiber is connected to the ports of the REG functions or the SDH and WDM equipment. If the WDM NE is not created on the T2000. if the normal fiber between an SDH NE and a WDM NE has been created on the T2000. Step 2 In the left pane select some ports from one or more NEs and click Search to search for the fibers or cables. This method is often used when the fiber link is not physically connected. you can supplement the information about the fiber by modifying the fiber/cable information. Click Delete Fiber/Cable. To check if the created fiber is consistent with the actual fiber connection.. ----End Subsequent Handling When the information about the fiber that is created through search is incomplete. the fiber is unidirectional. and if all the selected ports have fibers created. During fiber creation. leave the check box unchecked. Step 4 To create fibers. fibers that conflict with the selected fibers. proceed to Step 5 and delete it before creating fibers. select one or more fibers from the Newly Searched Fiber list and click Create Fiber/Cable. the fiber is created as a normal fiber. it is usually bidirectional. If there is any conflicting fiber. l l Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu. When a fiber is created. 2.4. the system only searches for the ports that do not have fibers. NOTE l l l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box. the fiber found by the trail search function is created as a virtual fiber. TIP You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 5. Depending on the communication mode. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Step 5 Click New in the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box. Ltd. and the Create Fibers in Batches dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. The NEs also communicate with each other through the extended ECC. Step 3 Click Select Object.4.5 Creating DCN Communication Cable The T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. Source Port. different types of cables can be created on the T2000. Step 6 Set Direction.. Step 2 Select a cable type from the expanded items. 2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. Repeat Step 3 to create another fiber connection. click Apply. The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created. Step 7 Click Apply. Source NE. Step 2 Click Create. Step 8 Click Cancel to complete the settings. Step 4 Click OK. select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box. ----End 2. The created fiber connections are displayed in the Fiber/ Cable Information list. Procedure Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Link from the shortcut menu. Sink NE and Sink Port.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Click NOTE In the case of a similar dialog box for selecting objects.6.. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. . the where you clicked. indicates that to select all the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes. l l indicates that to select the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer Process Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Click the Select Objects tab. For example. 2-17 . Ltd. modify the status of the preconfigured NE and so on.5 Creating a Topology Subnet The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. 2. Select the created NEs or subnet from the Available Objects pane. ----End icon appears in the position 2.6 Adjusting Topology Objects You can modify the settings when creating the network topology by using the T2000. The cable is displayed on the Main Topology between the T2000 and the GNE. you can allocate them in one topology subnet. Procedure Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet from the shortcut menu. adjust the optical NE source. Step 4 Click OK. 2. Enter the attributes of the subnet. Step 2 Click the Properties tab in the Add Object dialog box. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology. Step 4 Click OK. Background Information A topology subnet is created only to simplify the user interface and has no impact on the NEs. you have to return to the upper-level view of the subnet to view the created DCN communication cables. ----End Postrequisite If the NEs at the two ends of the DCN communication cables do not belong to the same subnet.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Step 3 Enter the cable attributes in the right-hand pane. 2.9 Copying Topology Objects In the current topology view. but modifying the IP address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs. The T2000 also uses the NE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases. On the T2000. you can copy a topology object from one subnet to another.6. you need to add boards on the NE Panel. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services. you can use the T2000 to achieve it.8 Naming a Fiber/Cable In the network management.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE After modifying the NE ID. you can create a new NE Explorer process and migrate some NEs to the new NE Explorer instance for management.6. 2. and type of a fiber/cable according to its connection status and physical features. length. and uses the NE ID as the key word in searches. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE. When an NE Explorer instance manages too many NEs. Ltd. you can create a new NE Explorer process and migrate some NEs to the new NE Explorer instance for management. 2. attenuation. you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. 2. you can use the preset naming rules to name the fiber/cable. you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering planning. This operation does not affect the running of the T2000.6.4 Modifying the NE ID The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) To ensure a load balance of the NE Explorer process.2 Modifying the NM Name You can modify the NM name as required. In the commissioning or expansion process. you can move a topology object from one subnet to another.10 Moving Topology Objects In the current topology view. 2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.6.. The deployment tool server is started.6.3 Modifying the NE Name You can modify the NE name as required.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information You can modify the name. you need to migrate NEs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 2. when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID. to ensure that faults can be fast located during maintenance and troubleshooting. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.6.6. This operation does not affect the running of the NE. it results a collision in the ECC route. you need to migrate NEs.6. Hence.6. When an NE Explorer instance manages too many NEs. 2. you need to strictly plan the fiber names. 2.6 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data.6. 2. it becomes difficult to manage some NEs.1 Balancing Load of the NE Explorer Process To ensure a load balance of the NE Explorer process. 2. As a result. Procedure Step 1 Choose System > NE Deploy Management from the Main Menu. The Migrate NE dialog box is displayed. ----End 2. and click . NOTE You can repeat Step 4 to move multiple NEs. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the NM icon on the Main Topology and choose Attribute from the shortcut menu. You can repeat Step 5 to move multiple NEs. The NE is displayed in the right-hand pane. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. select an NE that you want to move to the Sink NE Explorer.2 Modifying the NM Name You can modify the NM name as required. The NE is displayed in the left-hand pane. select an NE Explorer instance. 2-19 . Step 4 In the left-hand pane. enter a new NM name.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Context NOTE The type of the new NE Explorer instance must be the same as that of the NE Explorer instance with overloaded NEs. select the new NE Explorer instance. Step 2 In the left-hand pane.6. Ltd. Step 7 Click Close. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 3 In Sink NE Explorer. select an NE that you want to move to the Source NE Explorer.. and click NOTE . Step 6 Click OK. Step 2 In the NM Attribute dialog box. This operation does not affect the running of the T2000. The NE Deploy Management window is displayed. Step 5 Optional: In the right-hand pane. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click Migrate NE. Click OK. Ltd. you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a network. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The T2000 also uses the NE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases. Precautions CAUTION Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication and reset the NE. Hence. enter a new NE name in Name.2 Topology Management NOTE OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The NM name can contain letters. click the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. but cannot contain the following special characters: | : * ? " < >. and numerals. symbols and numerals. NOTE An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters. Click Apply.3 Modifying the NE Name You can modify the NE name as required. ----End 2. The NE must be created. Step 3 Click Close. and uses the NE ID as the key word in searches. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . If an NE ID conflicts with another NE.4 Modifying the NE ID The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. it results a collision in the ECC route. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. you can use the T2000 to achieve it.6. ----End 2. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.6. but cannot contain the following special characters: | : * ? " < >. when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID. Step 2 In the NE Attribute dialog box. In the commissioning or expansion process. As a result. it becomes difficult to manage some NEs. symbols. Step 2 Set the IP. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Ltd. Click OK. Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Step 3 Click Apply. and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE After modifying the NE ID. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. but modifying the IP address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.. Prerequisite l l The user must log in to the NE.6. select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering planning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. 2-21 . ----End 2. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. ----End 2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the corresponding physical board is online. where "x" indicates the basic ID.0.9. and default gateway must comply with the requirements for planning the external DCN.1. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list. you can configure the relevant services. The NE must be created. the IP address should be set to 129. you need to log in to the NE again. Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. you need to add boards on the NE Panel. the IP address should be set to 0x81000000 + NE ID. When you click a processing board that is paired with an interface board in the NE panel. Context The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment. Ltd.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter IP Value Range Default Value This parameter is preset to 129. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. If the NE is planned as a non-gateway NE. 2.. l Postrequisite After the IP address of the NE is changed. the NE IP address. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the T2000. Description l If the NE is planned as the gateway NE. After a logical board is created. the ID of the slot that houses the mapping interface board is displayed in orange. the configured services can be available. That is. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . subnet mask.x during the factory delivery. There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.0.6 Adding Boards When manually configuring the NE data. NOTE The NE panel is able to indicate the mapping relation between slots that house processing boards and interface boards. In this case. if the NE ID is 0x090001.6.9. the IP addresses of other NEs should be set according to the NE IDs. Step 2 Right-click a fiber/cable and choose Name by Rule from the shortcut menu.7 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information You can modify the name. Ltd. you can use the preset naming rules to name the fiber/cable. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management 2. Step 3 In the Length(km) column. right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. 2. 1. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. In the Type column. ----End 2. enter the actual length for the fiber/cable and click OK. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Modify the type of the fiber. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box. 1. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed. right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. On the T2000. 2-23 . In the Attenuation column. 2. Step 4 Modify the attenuation of a fiber.6. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the pane on the right. Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.8 Naming a Fiber/Cable In the network management. right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/ Cable from the shortcut menu. enter the actual loss and click OK. right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. The information of all fiber/ cable is displayed in the pane on the right. length. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. enter a proper name for the fiber/cable and click OK..6. select the actual type of the fiber from the drop-down list and click OK. attenuation. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed. Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Name column. to ensure that faults can be fast located during maintenance and troubleshooting. you need to strictly plan the fiber names. and type of a fiber/cable according to its connection status and physical features. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. 2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The value in the Name field automatically changes according to the configured naming rule. You can copy and paste multiple objects at a time. Context l l You cannot paste the same device or subnet to the destination subnet. you can copy a topology object from one subnet to another.. you can move a topology object from one subnet to another. Click the object.9 Copying Topology Objects In the current topology view. Click the object. Step 2 Choose Edit > Copy to copy the object to the clipboard. You cannot paste the same device or subnet to the destination subnet. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher.6.10 Moving Topology Objects In the current topology view. choose Paste to paste the object in the subnet. Step 2 Choose Edit > Cut to copy the object to the clipboard. Procedure Step 1 In the topology view. ----End 2. ----End 2. go to the source subnet of the object that you want to copy. the object is copied to the destination subnet and deleted from the source subnet. Step 3 Go to the destination subnet.6. ----End 2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. go to the source subnet of the object that you want to move. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher. Ltd. You can press and hold Shift to select two or more objects. Context l When you cut and paste an object. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . l Procedure Step 1 In the topology view. choose Paste to paste the object in the subnet. Step 3 Go to the destination subnet. 1 Deleting Topology Subnets When adjusting the topological structure of the network. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with the "Topo Operator" authority or higher. ----End 2.3 Deleting Boards To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration.7. you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.7. Ltd. Context After a subnet is deleted.7. Procedure Step 1 Right-click the subnet on the Main Topology. generally. you need to delete some objects of the topology. 2-25 .7.7. you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel. and choose the Delete shortcut menu. the topological objects in the original subnet are moved to the upperlevel subnet that the original subnet belongs to.4 Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong NE.2 Deleting Fibers When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs. 2. you can delete a subnet from the Main Topology if the subnet is not needed. Step 2 Click Yes to delete the subnet. 2. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..1 Deleting Topology Subnets When adjusting the topological structure of the network. you can delete the NE from the T2000. 2. 2. Step 3 Click Close in the Delete Object Results dialog box. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment. 2.7 Deleting Topology Objects When adjusting the network topology.7.2 Deleting Fibers When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs. you can delete a subnet from the Main Topology if the subnet is not needed.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management 2. you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs. trails and user-defined information. ----End 2. CAUTION The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets. ----End 2.3 Deleting Boards To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration. you can delete the NE from the T2000. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable. The services and protection groups must be deleted. Step 3 Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box. You can export the script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake. 2-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. right-click and choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.4 Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong NE. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Select the fiber you want to delete. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.7.7.2 Topology Management OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. Step 3 Click Step 4 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. you may need to delete the boards from the NE Panel. Step 4 Click OK to delete the board. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Click OK.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2 Topology Management Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher. Ltd. the links related to the NE are also deleted. Procedure l Delete a single or RTN NE. CAUTION If an NE is deleted. The Configuration Data In the left-hand pane. The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed. The Configuration Data Management window is displayed. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.. Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. 2. Right-click the NE on the Main Topology and choose Delete > Delete Device from the shortcut menu. Select the NEs to be deleted. . right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. 1. select multiple NEs and click Management List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs. The NE icon is deleted from the Main Topology. Click Yes. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 3. 2-27 . Context When the NE is not logged in. l 1. you can delete the NE on the T2000. Delete NEs in batches. 4. . 8 Creating REGs Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link. set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. 3-1 . 3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links in the SDH/PDH microwave. transmission frequency. 3.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. TX power.1 Configuration Flow The flow of configuring SDH/PDH radio links is different from the flow of configuring Hybrid radio links. 3. Ltd. you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode. 3. 3.6 Configuring the ATPC Function To configure the ATPC function. and ATPC attributes.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis About This Chapter Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites.. Hence. you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group. 3.3 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU. if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.7 Creating an N+1 Protection Group When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode. the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically. you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.2 Creating IF 1+1 Protection In the case of the IDU 620. 3. you need to configure the corresponding information about the radio link. 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) In the case of the 3+1 protection. Ltd. you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.. 3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Required when you need to configure the 3+1 protection. For details about the ATPC. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis 3. 3 4 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link Configuring the N+1 protection Required. For details about the N+1 protection. 3-3 .1 Configuration Flow The flow of configuring SDH/PDH radio links is different from the flow of configuring Hybrid radio links. Required when you set the ATPC threshold manually. 2 Creating the XPIC workgroup Required when the XPIC is configured. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. Required when you need to configure the 2+1 protection. Ltd. Configuring SDH/PDH Radio Links Table 3-1 Configuring SDH/PDH radio links Step 1 Operation Configuring the IF 1+1 protection Remarks Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details about the XPIC.. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. 5 6 Creating a REG Setting the ATPC attributes Required when the 3+1 protection is configured for the standby NE. you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.2 Creating IF 1+1 Protection In the case of the IDU 620. For details about the ATPC. That is. 4 Setting the ATPC attributes 3. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.3. 2 3 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute Required.5MHz. 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Configuring a Hybrid Radio Link Table 3-2 Configuring a Hybrid radio link Step 1 Operation Configuring the IF 1+1 protection Remarks Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured. The IF boards and their corresponding ODUs that form the IF 1+1 protection must be included in the NE Panel.QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 service by configuring the 1+1 protection. the original services are not interrupted. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.. Ltd. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.2E1. if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. For details about the Hybrid microwave. Required when you set the ATPC threshold manually. Precautions The 18. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . The system displays the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box. Step 3 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group. Step 2 Click Create. Step 4 Click OK. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3-5 .. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SD protection mode are compatible with the 1+1 HSB switching function. to transmit and receive the same signal. NonRevertive Revertive l l l 3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. to receive the same signal. With the 1+1 SD protection. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them. When this parameter is set to Revertive. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. In the 1+1 FD protection mode. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Set this parameter according to the planning information.. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. With the 1+1 FD protection. FD. Ltd. SD Default Value HSB Description l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode. the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. In the 1+1 SD protection mode. l l l l Revertive Mode Revertive. the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. It is recommended that you use the default value. a revertive switching occurs. they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enable and the reverse switching conditions are met. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time. Revertive Mode. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the 1+1 FD/SD mode. In the 1+1 HSB mode. This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Parameter WTR Time (s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that you use the default value. It is recommended that you use the default value. l l Enable Reverse Switching Enable. WTR Time (s). the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. The standby microwave link automatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of the ODU. two IF boards should be installed as a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is recommended to be the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is recommended to be the main board). you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later.. Postrequisite l In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board). When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms. 3-7 . Ltd. Disable Enable l l l Working Board Protection Board IF ports - l l NOTE The parameters Working Mode. the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Step 4 Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. and ATPC attributes. 3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed. The IFX boards and the ODUs to which the IFX boards are connected must be created. you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode.3 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.. 3. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. NOTE The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standby ODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group. you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis l OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) In the case of the 1+1 FD protection. TX power. transmission frequency. The standby microwave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link. The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled (default value) for the IFX boards. Step 3 Click New. Ltd. That is. Hence. the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. It is recommended that you install the two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column. ----End Parameters Parameter Polarization direction-V Polarization direction-H l Value Range IF ports of IFX boards Default Value - Description l Polarization direction-V and Polarization direction-H indicate the IF ports to which polarization direction V and polarization direction H correspond respectively. but the Link ID-V must be set to the same value at the two ends of a link and the Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at the two ends of a link. Link ID-V Link ID-H 1 to 4094 1 l l l l TX Power (dBm) -10. 3-9 .0 to 35. When the Link ID received by an NE is different from the Link ID set for the NE. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. These two parameters must be set to different values. Link ID-V and Link ID-H indicate the link IDs to which polarization direction V and polarization direction H correspond respectively.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Step 5 Click OK. Ltd. A Link ID is an identifier of a microwave link and is used to prevent the microwave links between sites from being wrongly connected.. Set these two parameters according to the planning information.0 0 l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The TX power of the ODU must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link. Set this parameter according to the planning information. Set the IF port on the IFX board that has a smaller slot number to Polarization direction-V and the IF port on the other IFX board to Polarization direction-H. In the case of areas where fast fading is severe. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l l Transmission Status mute. The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. During commissioning. The ATPC function enables the TX power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. Ltd. Disabled Disabled l l l ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm) -20 to -75 -35 to -90 -45 -70 l l 3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the TX power is not changed. When Transmission Status is set to unmute. re-set the ATPC attributes. set this parameter to unmute. When Transmission Status is set to mute. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . and must not be greater than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB. In normal cases. the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. unmute mute l l l ATPC Enabled Enabled. After the commissioning.295 Default Value 100 Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency.. Set this parameter according to the planning information.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Transmission Frequency (MHz) Value Range 0 to 4294967. the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPIC workgroup. need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODU Configuration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings. In this case. That is. l l l Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 4 Set the corresponding IF information of the radio link. In the case of the IDU 610/620. one protection group corresponds to one radio link. Precautions l In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode. one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links..4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links in the SDH/PDH microwave. the IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board must be added. In this case. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board belongs. you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600 and the ODU information of the standby OptiX RTN 600. In 1+1 FD protection mode. however. The IF/ODU information of the radio links should be configured in the XPIC workgroup. In the case of XPIC radio links. In the case of N+1 radio links. you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You. 3-11 . Ltd. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. Then. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. one protection group corresponds to one radio link. Postrequisite Generally. one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio links and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be set respectively. 3. Step 2 Click IF/ODU Configuration.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) NOTE 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Step 6 Set the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. ----End 3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 7 Click Apply. NOTE Click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and after you set the ODU information of the radio link.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 5 Click Apply. Ltd. 14MHz. 16QAM 3. 64QAM 16.QPS K 17. 128QAM 13. channel spacing. service capacity. The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Work Mode.E3. 128QAM (IFX) Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode.28MHz.QPS K 9.28MHz. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7.28MHz.4E1. The IF1A/IF1B board supports radio work modes 1–15 and the IF0A/IF0B board supports radio work modes 5 and 16–18.QP SK 6.16E1.3.26E1.QPS K 2.14MHz.3.2E1. 16QAM 10.5E1..Q PSK 18.14MHz.44E1.14MHz. 128QAM 8.QP SK (IF0A/B) 7.7MHz.5MHz.8E1.14MHz.7MHz.7MHz.14MHz.28MHz.QPSK (IF1A/B) 5. modulation mode" format.E3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Parameters Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1. 32QAM 11.32E1. 32QAM 15. 16QAM 14.22E1.28MHz.4E1.53E1.4E1. l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.14MHz. Set this parameter according to the planning.8E1.28MHz. 3-13 .10E1.28MHz.STM-1.STM-1.28MHz. 16QAM 7.16E1. Ltd.16E1.7MHz. 64QAM 12.QPS K 4. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.35E1.QP SK l Default Value 1.5MHz. 16QAM 5. and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same. l l ATPC Enable Status Enabled. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. Disabled Enabled l l l 3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Link ID Value Range 1–4094 Default Value 1 Description l As the identifier of a radio link. the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream. When the function is enabled. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end. within the ATPC controlled range. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. Disabled Disabled l l l ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Enabled. When the function is disabled. After the commissioning is complete. Ltd. If this parameter is different from Received Link ID. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. set this parameter to Disabled. this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites.. To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . you can set this parameter to another value. Set this parameter according to the planning. the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. The difference between the TX frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing.0 -10. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high. 3-15 . set this parameter to 0. Set this parameter according to the planning.295 Default Value 0.0 l l l TX Status mute. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.. This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing.0 Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. unmute unmute l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. Ltd. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low. The TX power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.295 0. When this parameter is set to unmute.0 to +35.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range 0–4294967. When this parameter is set to mute. indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. this parameter takes the default value.50% channel spacing. Set this parameter according to the planning. the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals.0 l l l T/R Spacing (MHz) 0–4294967. Generally. the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. l l l TX Power (dBm) -10. This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum TX frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum TX frequency supported by the ODU . do as follows: 1. Background Information The IDU 620 supports the Hybrid/AM function. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 2 Click Query. Set IF Channel Bandwidth to 40M.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) NOTE The ATPC attributes at both the ends of a radio link should be set to the same. Set AM Enable Status to Disable. NOTE To set the Hybrid IF board to work in super PDH mode of 40M/64QAM. Click Apply. That is. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to 64QAM. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the Hybrid/AM function. 2. Then. the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically. 3. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. choose Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Ltd.. Procedure Step 1 Select the target Hybrid IF board in the NE Explorer. Hence. ----End 3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Apply.5 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. The IFH2 board is used as the Hybrid IF board. the Hybrid microwave can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide dynamic bandwidth for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Generally. an AM switching in one direction of the radio link (when the conditions for triggering the AM switching are met) does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link. Set this parameter to the planned value. 3-17 . l Hence. When this parameter is set to Enable. The super PDH mode does not support the AM function. Set this parameter to the planned value. the radio link uses the specified modulation scheme only. l AM Enable Status l l Disable Enable - When this parameter is set to Disable. Ltd. you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid microwave must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M - AM Mode Asymmetric When this parameter is set to Asymmetric. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable. the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid microwave and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.. Generally. NOTE Only the combination of the IF Channel Bandwidth of 40M and the modulation mode of 64QAM forms the super PDH mode. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity l l l l l l QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 128QAM This parameter specifies the highest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity l l l l l l QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. In this case. the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Parameters Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range In the case of the IFH2 board of the IDU 620: l l l l l Default Value 7M Description IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. Set this parameter to the planned value. QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM E1 Capacity 1–75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1 services that can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disable. Precautions l In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode Value Range l l l l l l Default Value - Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for the transmission. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is. Ltd. Step 3 Set the ATPC attributes. The related IF board must be added. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity. 3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Configuring the ATPC Function To configure the ATPC function. set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the following configuration dialog boxes: – – l Create an XPIC working group IF/ODU configuration NOTE In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Procedure Step 1 Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified. set only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board. 3. The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface configuration dialog box of the IF board. l ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm) -20 to -75 -35 to -90 -45 -70 l l ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Enabled. Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. Ltd.. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. In the case of areas where fast fading is severe.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Step 4 Click Apply. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. When the function is enabled. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. ----End Parameters Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Enabled. 3-19 . When the function is disabled. Disabled Enabled l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB. In Select Mapping direction. Repeat Step 4. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface boards (only in the case of the primary NE that is to be configured with 3+1 protection) must be created. Step 3 Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group. Step 2 Click Create. 2. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In Select Mapping Mode. you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration. set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. . 1. In Select Mapping direction. select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click . 4. 3. 5. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. the original services are not interrupted.2 to select the line ports to which other working channels correspond. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is. Ltd. Background Information When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service by configuring the N+1 protection. select Working Unit.7 Creating an N+1 Protection Group When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. In Select Mapping Mode. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. select Protection Unit. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. 3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode. select the line port to which a working channel corresponds and click 3.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis NOTE OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l l Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link. The system displays the Create an N+1 Protection Group dialog box. During commissioning. re-set the ATPC attributes. After the commissioning. In the case of the 3+1 protection. the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. map two IF ports as Working Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. Ltd. Disabled Enabled l l Slot Mapping Relation - - l l NOTE The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must have the same attributes. and map the other line port as Protection Unit. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3-21 . When SD enable is set to Enabled.. it is recommended that you map the two IF ports and the first line port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the secondary NE as Working Unit. It is recommended that you use the default value.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Step 5 Click OK. In the case of 2+1 protection. a revertive switching occurs. ----End Parameters Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time. It is recommended that you use the default value. l SD enable Enabled. 2. select the line port to which the west line corresponds and click . In Select Mapping Mode. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the primary NE must be created.3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3. 4. Choose Configuration > REG Configuration from the Function Tree. In Slot Mapping Direction.8 Creating REGs In the case of the 3+1 protection. 3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. Step 2 Click Create. Ltd. 1. select West Line. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. In Select Mapping Mode. Context In the case of the 3+1 protection. select the line port to which the east line corresponds and click . you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 3. select East Line. In Slot Mapping Direction. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode. Step 3 Set the SD Enabled parameter. you need to two configure REGs for the secondary NE. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The system displays the Create REG dialog box. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . That is. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. 3-23 . Create another REG. It is recommended that you use the default value.. Disabled Default Value Enabled Description l When this parameter is set to Enabled. l Slot Mapping Relation - - It is recommended that you map the IF port as West Line and the port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board as East Line. the REG inserts an MS-AIS alarm when a B2_SD alarm is generated. 3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .3 Configuring Radio Links on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter SD Enabled Value Range Enabled. Ltd. 4. configure the linear MSP. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..1 Configuring the Ring MSP If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services.2 Creating Linear MSP To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis About This Chapter The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP. you can configure the ring MSP. 4. 4-1 . Ltd. In Select Mapping Mode. select East Line 1. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Click Create.1 Configuring the Ring MSP If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services. The system displays the Create a Ring Multiplex Section dialog box.4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4. West Node. Ltd.. Step 3 Click OK. select West Line 1. you can configure the ring MSP. 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service. and East Node according to the networking plan. Choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. In Select Mapping Mode. 1. Step 5 Set the slot mapping relation. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 5. In Select Mapping Direction. In Select Mapping Direction. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. . 3. That is. 2. the original services are not interrupted. Background Information When an unprotected service is converted into a ring MSP service by configuring the ring MSP. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . A prompt is displayed. select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click . Step 4 Set the attributes of the ring MSP protection group according to the networking plan. select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click 4. Set Local Node. The value is always set to 2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis Step 6 Click OK. Ltd.. l West Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the west line board of the local NE is connected. 4-3 . ----End Parameters Parameter Level Protection Type Local Node Value Range 0 to 15 Default Value 0 Description The value is always set to STM-4. East Node 0 to 15 0 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The node ID of each NE must be unique. l This parameter specifies the node ID allocated to the local NE. This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the east line board of the local NE is connected. 4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is recommended that you use the default value. Restructure Protocol New Protocol l l Slot Mapping Relation - - It is recommended that you map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 6 as West Line 1 and map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 8 as East Line 1. Not selected Not selected If you select Map as VC4. and East Node. When SD enable is set to Enabled. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . the VC-4 is considered as the unit of the settings in the slot mapping relation. If extra services need to be transmitted. you need to configure bidirectional crossconnections between the services and the timeslots of the working channel (the first half of the timeslots of the line port) later. It is recommended that you use the default value. It is recommended that you select the new protocol. you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the timeslots of the protection channel (the second half of the timeslots of the line port). Ltd.. select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment. West Node. l NOTE The protection groups of the NEs that form a ring multiplex section must be set with the same attributes except Local Node. Disabled Enabled l l Protocol Type New Protocol. a revertive switching occurs. l Map as VC4 Selected. It is recommended that you use the default value. The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol. Postrequisite In the case of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l SD enable Enabled.4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter. 4. The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured. select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click 3. A prompt is displayed. That is. . configure the linear MSP. select West Working Unit. In Select Mapping direction. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. NOTE When Protection Type is set to 1:N Protection. In Select Mapping Mode. select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click . Ltd. 2. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Background Information When an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linear MSP. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. the original services are not interrupted. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.2 Creating Linear MSP To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis 4. Step 2 Click Create. indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service. In Select Mapping direction. Step 3 Set the attributes of the linear MSP group. select West Protection Unit. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 1. In Select Mapping Mode. 4-5 . the services on the working channels in two directions are switched to the protection channels. When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. 1:N Protection l Default Value 1+1 Protection l Description l Single-Ended Switching. DualEnded Switching (1+1 protection) Dual-Ended Switching (1:N protection) Single-Ended Switching (1+1 protection) Dual-Ended Switching (1:N protection) l l l l In the single-ended mode. Ltd. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. if the services on the working channels in a certain direction need to be switched. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . only the services on the working channels in the direction are switched to the protection channels. In the dual-ended mode. ----End Parameters Parameter Protection Type Switching Mode Value Range 1+1 Protection. 4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 5 Click OK. select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted. l l SD enable Enabled. It is recommended that you select the new protocol. When extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels exist. a revertive switching occurs. The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol. 4-7 . Revertive (1+1 protection) Revertive (1:N protection) Non-Revertive (1 +1 protection) Revertive (1:N protection) l l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive. the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l l WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment. When SD enable is set to Enabled. select 1:N protection. It is recommended that you use the default value. it is recommended that you select the 1+1 single-ended and non-revertive mode. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Revertive Mode Value Range l Default Value l Description l Non-Revertive. In the case of other situations. Restructure Protocol New Protocol l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Disabled Enabled l l Protocol Type New Protocol. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time. It is recommended that you use the default value.. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the protection channels. in the case of 1:N protection. l l NOTE Ensure that the MSP groups of the equipment at both ends of the linear multiplex section are set with the same attributes. a maximum of three line ports can be mapped as West Working Unit. Postrequisite l In the case of the 1:N linear MSP.4 Configuring the MSP on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Slot Mapping Relation Value Range - Default Value - Description l In the case of 1+1 protection.. If extra services need to be transmitted. In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP. in addition to configuring the bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels. Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l 4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. if possible. you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels later. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd. you need to configure unidirectional cross-connections between the services and the protection channels. Ensure that the line port that is mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port that is mapped as West Working Unit are not on the same board. only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions. 5. 5. 5. 5.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links. 5-1 . one service source corresponds to one service sink.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service When a point-to-point service is not used.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services After converting the normal services into the SNCP services.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the PerNE Basis About This Chapter The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services. you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink. 5. 5. you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services. Ltd.6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service When a service is not used.. 5. 5. according to the cross-connection type. you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive direction of the SNCP services. . Ltd.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) After converting the SNCP services into the normal services. 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . you can convert the SNCP crossconnection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services. 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x 3 + TU-12 number. This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.1) x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21. l By order This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links. Figure 5-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order TUG-2 1 1 2 4 25 46 5 26 47 6 27 48 3 7 28 49 8 29 50 9 30 51 4 10 31 52 11 32 53 12 33 54 5 13 34 55 14 35 56 15 36 57 6 16 37 58 17 38 59 18 39 60 7 19 40 61 20 41 62 21 42 63 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 TU-12 TUG-3 2 3 { { { 1 22 43 2 23 44 3 24 45 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5-3 . VC-12 Timeslot Numbering Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when you create cross-connections. where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number .. Ltd. The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that adopts the interleaved scheme or when specific timeslot numbering scheme is required.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis 5. which is the default scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment. l Interleaved scheme This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme. where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number .707. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Prerequisite l l The source and sink boards must be configured. Ltd.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services. select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. Step 3 Click Create. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 2 Optional: Click Options. Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service. the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.. If you need to configure VC-3 crossconnections and VC-12 cross-connections in a VC-4 path at the same time. one service source corresponds to one service sink. note that the timeslots in the TUG-3 that are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12 cross-connections. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Then. That is. Then. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. 5. 5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 5-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme 1 2 4 5 6 25 26 27 46 47 48 3 7 8 9 28 29 30 49 50 51 TUG-2 4 10 11 12 31 32 33 52 53 54 5 13 14 15 34 35 36 55 56 57 6 16 17 18 37 38 39 58 59 60 7 19 20 21 40 41 42 61 62 63 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 TU-12 1 TUG-3 2 3 { { { 1 2 3 22 23 24 43 44 45 VC-3 Timeslot Numbering A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. set this parameter to VC3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Step 5 Click OK. ----End Parameters Parameter Level Value Range VC12/VC3/VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections. l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If all the services in a VC-4 path are passed through the NE. In the case of E1 services or data services in bound VC-12 paths. the creation may fail due to the limited number of licenses. The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of E3/T3 services or data services in bound VC-3 paths. the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. NOTE l l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board. For example. Ltd.. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1. 5-5 . In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4 services. set this parameter to VC4. the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of licenses that are used for 21xE1. set this parameter to VC12. l l l Sink Slot Sink Port Sink VC4 - - Sets the solt of the sink service. When this parameter is set to Bidirectional. The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2 board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12 timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12 VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4. l Source Timeslot Range(e.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Direction Value Range Unidirectional. This parameter indicates the number of the VC-4 path where the service source is located.3–6) - - This parameter indicates the timeslot range corresponding to the service source. 4. create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink only.3– 6" indicates 1. 5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards and E3/T3 interface boards correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1–n. E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radio correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1– n. If the IF board works in the PDH mode.g. and 6. This parameter indicates the port where the service source is located. use ".1. This parameter indicates the port where the service sink is located. When this parameter is set to multiples values. "1. create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. For example." to separate each value and use "–" to indicate sequential numbers. Bidirectional Default Value Bidirectional Description l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional. 3. l l Source Slot Source Port Source VC4 - - Sets the slot of the source service. This parameter indicates the number of the VC-4 path where the service sink is located. Ltd. 5. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . This parameter can be set to a value or multiple values.. 3–6) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter indicates the timeslot range corresponding to the service sink.g. 5-7 . select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box. and 6. "1. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.3– 6" indicates 1. 5. Then. For example. select Interleaved or Complete Service to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. When you need to imposes the crossconnection immediately. l l l Activate Immediately Yes. Step 2 Click Options.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the IF board works in the PDH mode. When this parameter is set to multiples values. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured. 4. Ltd. The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2 board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12 timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12 VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards and E3/T3 interface boards correspond to VC-12/VC3 timeslots 1–n. This parameter can be set to a value or multiple values. No Yes Sets whether to immediately activate the cross-connection.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e. E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radio correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1– n. use ". 3. That is. 5. Step 3 Click Create SNCP.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer." to separate each value and use "–" to indicate sequential numbers. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Yes.1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . ----End Parameters Parameter Service Type Value Range SNCP Default Value SNCP Description - 5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.. Step 5 Click OK.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4 services. The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. the creation may fail due to the limited number of licenses. For example. the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of licenses that are used for 21xE1. Ltd. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number of licenses that are used for 42xE1. NOTE l l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board. set this parameter to VC12. When this parameter is set to NonRevertive. set this parameter to VC3. When a line fault occurs. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. 5-9 . It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600. Ltd. an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. VC3. VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l Specifies the level of the crossconnection to be created. both the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction and the cross-connections in the SNCP transmit direction are created. If the service is an E3/T3 service or a data service that is bound with VC-3 paths. l l l Revertive Mode Non-Revertive. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.. set this parameter to VC4. Bidirectional Bidirectional l l l Hold-off Time (100ms) 0 to 100 0 l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. only the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction are created. When this parameter is set to Unidirectional. Revertive Non-Revertive l l l Direction Unidirectional. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. If all the services in a VC-4 pass through the NE.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Level Value Range VC12. When this parameter is set to Bidirectional. If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 paths. When this parameter is set to Revertive. For example. l l Sink Slot Sink VC4 - - Indicates the sink slot of the service. l l Source Slot Source VC4 Source Timeslot Range(e. a revertive switching occurs. 5. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists.3-6) - - Indicates the source slot of the service. use ". Ltd. l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds. Similarly. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists. When you set this parameter to several numbers. 3. 4. In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode. "1.g. and 6.. 5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. It is recommended that you use the default value." to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.1. 3-6" indicates numbers 1. If you need to immediately deliver the crossconnection that is configured to NEs. Hence. it is not recommended to select this check box. set the value of this parameter to Yes. the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For example. l l Configure SNCP Tangent Ring Checked.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e. 3-6" indicates numbers 1.1. "1. Generally." to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. No Yes Sets whether to immediately activate the cross-connection that is configured. When you set this parameter to several numbers.. Ltd. Unchecked Unchecked After you select the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring check box. Similarly. and later. 3. you can configure the SNCP services on tangent points of SNCP rings in a fast manner. use ".3-6) Value Range - Default Value - Description l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds. a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive direction is created. and 6.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level. 5-11 . In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode. Activate Immediately Yes. you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions. the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. 5. 5. you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail.g. You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. Postrequisite If Direction is set to Unidirectional. 4. Then. the SNCP service considers the HP_UNEQ alarm as an SD switching condition. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Step 5 Repeat Step 3. Step 7 Click Yes.. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. It is recommended that you use the default value. Ltd. Not selected Default Value Not selected Description l When this item is selected. click OK. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. ----End Parameters Parameter UNEQ Value Range Selected. An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. l 5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the working service corresponds. Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching. Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Step 6 Click Apply.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protection service corresponds. When this item is selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the SNCP service considers the HP_TIM alarm as an SD switching condition. Then. Not selected Default Value Not selected Description l When this item is selected. The cross-connections of the point-to-point service must be configured and the point-to-point service is not used. 2.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter TIM Value Range Selected. 5-13 . Click Query. 5. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Are you sure to continue?. the SNCP service considers the B3_EXC alarm as an SD switching condition. It is recommended that you use the default value. 1. It is recommended that you use the default value. That is. l SD Selected. Ltd. It is recommended that you use the default value.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Click OK. you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources. Not selected Not selected l l NOTE It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation Condition of the protection service. Not selected Not selected l l EXC Selected. the SNCP service considers the B3_SD alarm as an SD switching condition. prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. When this item is selected.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Point-to-Point Service When a point-to-point service is not used. Step 2 Query the data. 6 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service When a service is not used. 1. That is. 3. prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. 1. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Are you sure to continue?. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. 3. Step 5 Delete the service. 4. ----End 5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service is not be used. Click OK. prompting Operation succeeded. prompting Operation succeeded. Step 4 Deactivate the service. Click Delete. Step 6 Click Query. Click Close. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the point-to-point service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. prompting Operation succeeded. Then. Are you sure to continue?. At this time. Click Query. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 5-14 . 2. Then. Ltd. 3. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Click Close. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Click OK. 1.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Then. Then. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Then. 2. prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services)?. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed. you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources. Step 2 Query the data. Click OK. select the NE and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Deactivate. Then. Click Close. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. the cross-connection of the point-to-point service is already deleted. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.. the cross-connection of the SNCP service is already deleted. 1. 1. Click OK.7 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services After converting the normal services into the SNCP services. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Then. Step 4 Deactivate the service. At this time. Step 5 Delete the service. 3. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Delete. 3. prompting Operation succeeded. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Then. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Ltd. prompting Operation succeeded.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis 2. Click Close. Click OK. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the SNCP service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Click Deactivate. prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services?). the original services are not interrupted. 2. Click Close. 5-15 . Background Information When this task is performed to convert a normal service into an SNCP service. Click OK. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive direction of the SNCP services. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed. Are you sure to continue?. Then. Then. Click Close. Click OK. the OK dialog box is displayed. The unidirectional cross-connection of normal services must be configured and the source of the cross-connection must be a line board.. That is. prompting Operation succeeded. 4. prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. ----End 5. 3. Then. Step 6 Click Query. 2. Then. Step 6 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service. Then. Then. Are you sure to continue?. 1. Step 2 Optional: Query the data. the service may be interrupted. Are you sure to continue?. 2. Click OK. 5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Click OK. the Confirm dialog box is displayed.. right-click and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu. right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu. Then. prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service data at the NM. Step 4 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Click Close. Step 3 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. prompting Operation Succeeded. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. 3. Click Query. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . prompting If the normal service is change into a SNCP service. Then. Ltd. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. 5-17 . When this parameter is set to NonRevertive. Ltd. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Revertive Default Value Non-Revertive Description l When this parameter is set to Revertive. ----End Parameters Parameter Revertive Mode Value Range Non-Revertive..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Step 7 Click OK. Ltd. an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists. 4.g. In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode. use "." to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms) Value Range 0 to 100 Default Value 0 Description l When a line fault occurs. It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600. Similarly. 5. It is recommended that you use the default value.. This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. 5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3-6) - - Indicates the source slot of the service. l WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l l l Source Slot Source VC4 Source Timeslot Range(e. "1. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time. and 6. l l Sink Slot Sink VC4 - - Indicates the sink slot of the service. 3. Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists. 3–6" indicates numbers 1.1. l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds. For example. You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. a revertive switching occurs. When you set this parameter to several numbers. The normal service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the configuration. you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail." to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. Ltd. You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers.3-6) Value Range - Default Value - Description l Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds.1. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 4. "1. 5-19 . In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode. Similarly. When you set this parameter to several numbers. 3–6" indicates numbers 1. The current service is transmitted in the working path. 3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.. l l Postrequisite The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.g. use ". Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can convert the SNCP crossconnection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services. 5. the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Background Information When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a normal service.8 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services After converting the SNCP services into the normal services. For example. the original services are not interrupted. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Later. and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. 5. The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured. and 6. That is. ----End Postrequisite You need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working path or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. Step 3 Click OK. 5-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Configuring SDH/PDH Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Right-click and choose Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu. Ltd. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. The SNCP service can be converted into the normal service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the deletion. Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. select the cross-connection. you need not configure protection for the clock sources. Otherwise.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis About This Chapter All the transmission nodes on a digital transmission network must be synchronized. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual networking architecture.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. As a result. 6. the overflow or exhaustion of the bits occurs in the buffer. 6. protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality. the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality of the clock sources. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks. 6. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To ensure that all the NEs on the digital transmission network are synchronized. 6.. which causes the sliding damage to the data flow.2 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme. the data is incorrect.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters In certain situations. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. Ltd. 6-1 . you need to configure the clock for each NE and need to configure the clock protection in the case of a complex network.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. 6. thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock. Hence. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order.. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection. Hence. Hence. when the radio link is configured with XPIC or N+1 protection). configure this clock source for this node. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. Configure the clock source of the higher-level radio link for other nodes. the node configures a microwave clock source for each radio link and allocates different clock priority levels based on the situation of each radio link. When multiple higher-level radio links exist. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual networking architecture.6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6. l l l l 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Note that the clock source priority of the main radio link should be higher than the clock source priority of the standby radio link. (for example. Do not configure the synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection. Hence. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. When the higher-level radio link adopts 1+1 protection. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Chain/Tree Network The clock synchronization schemes for chain/tree networks are as follows: l If the main (first) node accesses a clock source (external clock or line clock). The IF1A boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an IF 1+1 protection group (the board in slot 5 is the main board) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. and internal clock source in the descending order. 7-IF1A-1. l l l l Figure 6-1 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a chain network. configure two clock sources for the corresponding node. the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Ltd. Hence. The IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup (the IFX board in slot 5 works on polarization V and the IFX board in slot 7 is works on polarization H) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source.. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence. Hence. 7-IF1A-1.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis Figure 6-1 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 External 1/ Internal Master clock 5-IF1A-1/ 7-IF1A-1/ Internal 5-IF1A-1/ Internal 5-IF1A-1/ Internal Figure 6-2 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a tree network. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. and internal clock source in the descending order. 6-3 . Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection. Hence. l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 6-2 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network NE3 NE1 NE2 5-IF1A-1/ Internal NE4 4-SL1-1/ Internal 5-IFX-1/ 7-IFX-1/ Internal Master clock 5-IF1A-1/ Internal Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Ring Network The clock synchronization schemes for a ring network formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment only or formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment and other OptiX equipment are as follows: l When the entire ring network line is an SDH line. l l The SSM or extended SSM protection is enabled on all the nodes in the ring network. The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. l 6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Figure 6-3 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which the entire ring network line is an SDH line. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . east clock source. divide the ring network into two chains and set the synchronization according to the clock synchronization schemes of a chain network. When a PDH section exists on the line of the ring network. the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order. set the SSM or extended SSM according to the clock synchronization schemes of an optical transmission network. The clock source priority levels of other nodes are the west clock source. Hence. Ltd. and internal clock source in the descending order.. l This ring network is formed by PDH microwave. NE3 traces the clock of NE4. Hence. Hence. the clock source level priority levels are the west clock source and internal clock source in the descending order. the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order. l l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order. NE4 traces the clock of the main node. Hence. 6-5 . Hence. the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection. NE2 traces the clock of the main node. Ltd. Hence.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis Figure 6-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line) NE2 NE1 West/ East/ Internal West/ East/ Internal NE6 External 1/ Internal West/ East/ Internal NE3 Master clock NE4 West/ East/ Internal NE5 West/ East/ Internal Figure 6-4 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which not the entire ring network line is an SDH line. divide the ring network at the main node NE1 into two chains: from NE1 to NE2 and from NE3 to NE4. The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. the clock source level priority levels are 4-PO1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. When a lower-level NE is connected to multiple hops of radio links.. In this case. the downstream nodes will report point adjustments if NE4 adopts the tributary clock source. NE3 converges services TO NE2 through ports 1–4 of the PO1 board in slot 4. l Figure 6-5shows the clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports. the lower-level NEs should trace the external clock output by the higher-level NE. Ltd. Multiple microwave hops exist in the downstream of NE4. Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection. The clock synchronization schemes for networking with convergence at tributary ports are as follows: l l l The higher-level NE accesses the clock source (external clock source or line clock source). Issue 02 (2009-06-15) l l l 6-6 . Hence. Hence. The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. NE4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Hence. the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Therefore. abnormal pointer adjustments may occur if the lower-level NE traces the tributary clock. the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order. Hence. The lower-level NEs trace the tributary clock sources (port 1 and port 5 of the PO1/PH1/ PD1 board can be used as the tributary clock sources).6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 6-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line) NE1 NE2 4-SL1-1/ Internal NE4 West/ Internal NE3 East/ Internal Master clock East/ Internal Clock Synchronization Scheme for Networking with Convergence at Tributary Ports Networking with convergence at tributary ports indicates that several OptiX RTN 600 NEs are converged to the higher-level OptiX RTN NE through the E1/E3 cable. the clock signals can be passed over SDH signals not over PDH signals. Thus. which ensures the high quality of the clock. new clock sources need be added to the chain for use compensation. The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured. Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports NE3 NE1 NE2 4-PO1-1/ Internal NE4 External 1/ Internal 5-IF1A-1/ Internal External/ Internal Master clock E1 External clock Precautions for Making the Clock Synchronization Scheme The precautions for making the clock synchronization scheme are as follows: l The number of the NEs on the long clock chain must not exceed 20.. Ltd. l Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection. Use SDH interface boards to converge services at the convergence node. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is recommended that the long clock chain contains less than 10 NEs. That is. If the long clock chain contains too many NEs. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. l 6. thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis adopts the external clock output from NE2 as the external clock input to the PXC board in slot 1.2 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme. 6-7 . you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 3 Select the clock sources. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . ----End 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can select multiple clock sources at one time. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority.6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources. Step 8 Click Apply. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources. The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row.. Step 4 Click OK. Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. TIP By pressing the Ctrl key. Ltd. The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks. Generally.. This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. Set this parameter depending on the external clock signal. IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock source of the synchronous Ethernet. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. you need not configure protection for the clock sources. This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s. This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis Parameters Parameter Clock Source Value Range – Default Value – Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 1. 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l l Synchronization Status Byte SA4–SA8 SA4 l l l 6. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 3. This parameter need to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwave clock source. the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. 6-9 . l l l l External Clock Source Mode 2 Mbit/s. Generally. the external clock sources use the SA4 to pass the SSM. Determine the clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels according to the clock synchronization schemes. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. Click Apply. 3. Click the Clock ID Status tab. Step 3 Set the SSM output port. Ltd. Set the clock ID output port. That is. Click the SSM Output Control tab. Enable the clock protection protocol and set the protocol parameters.6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Step 4 Optional: Set the clock ID output port. 2. 1. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 2. 1. 1. Click the Clock Subnet tab. Set the SSM output port. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The clock source priority table must be configured. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.. 3. Step 2 Enable the clock protection protocol. Click Apply. 2. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis 3. 6-11 . It defines the unique ID for each clock source and uses the higher four bits of the S1 byte to pass the ID. Stop SSM Protocol Default Value Stop SSM Protocol Description l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management in an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The NEs that trace the same clock source should be allocated with the same clock subnet ID. Click Apply. The extended SSM protocol is the extension of the standard SSM protocol. The extended SSM protocol can be used to prevent the NEs from tracing their own clocks. l l l Affiliated Subnet 0–255 0 l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network and clock mutual tracing can be prevented through certain configurations of the clock sources. it is recommended that the extended SSM protocol is used. If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network. This parameter is used when the clock subnet need to be created on the NMS. enable the SSM protocol. ----End Parameters Parameter Protection Status Value Range Start Extended SSM Protocol. the SSM protocol can also be enabled. Ltd. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically select the clock source with the highest quality and highest priority. Start Standard SSM Protocol.. If third-party equipment exists in the ring network. thus preventing clock mutual tracing. 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Clock Source ID Value Range (None), 0–15 Default Value (None) Description l This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled. Allocate the clock source ID for the following clock sources only: – – l External clock sources Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings – – Control Status Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is enabled. This parameter indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled. This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled. This parameter indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet and the extended SSM protocol is enabled at the remote NE, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled. l l Enable Status Enabled, Disabled. Enabled l l l 6.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The PXC board must be configured. 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis Precautions In the OptiX RTN 600, external clock source 1 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 1 and external clock source 2 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 3. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the clock output parameters. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End Parameters Parameter External Clock Output Mode Value Range 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz Default Value 2 Mbit/s Description l This parameter indicates the mode of the output clock. Set this parameter according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s. This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. When this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that each bit can transmit the SSM. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This parameter indicates the lowest clock quality of the output clock. When the clock quality is lower than the parameter value, the signal is not output. When this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the clock signal is continuously output. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. l External Clock Output Timeslot SA4–SA8, ALL ALL l l l l External Clock Output Threshold Threshold Disabled, Not Inferior to G. 813 SETS Signal, Not Inferior to G. 812 Local Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal Threshold Disabled l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-13 6 Configuring the Clock on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition Value Range No Failure Condition, AIS, LOF, AIS OR LOF Default Value No Failure Condition Description l This parameter indicates the conditions when the 2M phase-locked clock source fails. It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter is valid only when 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition is No Failure Condition. This parameter indicates the action of the 2M phase-locked loop when 2M PhaseLocked Source Fail Condition is met. It is recommended that you use the default value. l 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action Shut Down Output, 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable, Send AIS Shut Down Output l l l 6.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters In certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality of the clock sources. Table 6-1 lists the navigation path for customizing the clock parameters. For details, see the Online help of the NMS. Table 6-1 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters Clock Parameter Clock source switching condition Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Clock source quality 6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis About This Chapter In the case of the SDH/PDH microwave, Ethernet services are transmitted in a way similar to the Ethernet over SDH transmission mode. Hence, you need to configure the mapping relation between the Ethernet services and VCTRUNKs and configure the cross-connections between the paths bound with the VCTRUNKs and the timeslots contained in the cable, during the configuration of Ethernet services. 7.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links). 7.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. 7.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. 7.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements. 7.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. 7.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services) Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-1 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 7.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links). 7.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth. 7.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL services, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags. 7.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared pointto-point virtual private line services for different users. 7.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags. 7.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN services. 7.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services. 7.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags. 7.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth. Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used to configure point-to-point EPL services. Table 7-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards Procedur e 1 2 Operation Configuring external Ethernet ports Configuring internal Ethernet ports Remarks Required Required Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-3 the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags. Required. For details about the QoS. Required.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedur e 3 Operation Creating EPL services Remarks l Required when the Ethernet switching boards are used Not required when the Ethernet transparent transmission boards are used l 4 Creating cross-connections of Ethernet services Required 7. and configuring the traffic shaping. Optional. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL services. configuring the CoS. configuring the CAR. Table 7-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services Step 1 2 3 4 5 Operation Configuring external Ethernet ports Configure internal Ethernet ports Creating Ethernet private line services Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Configuring the QoS Remarks Required. binding the CAR and CoS. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . For details about the QoS. Required. 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmissio n System Feature Description. NOTE Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow..1. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services. Ltd. NOTE Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow. and configuring the traffic shaping. configuring the CAR.1. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. Required. configuring the CoS. The services of different 802. Required. For the method of configuring QinQ-based EVPL services. For details about the QoS.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. but the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmissio n System Feature Description. 7.1d bridges are isolated from each other. Table 7-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services Step 1 2 3 4 5 Operation Configuring external Ethernet ports Configure internal Ethernet ports Creating Ethernet private line services Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Configuring the QoS Remarks Required. The 802.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. binding the CAR and CoS. 7-5 . 7. For details about the QoS.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN services. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 7.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared pointto-point virtual private line services for different users. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. Required. Optional..4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. For details about the QoS. The 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services Step 1 2 3 4 Operation Configuring external Ethernet ports Configure internal Ethernet ports Creating Ethernet LAN services Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Remarks Required. Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same 802. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. and configuring the traffic shaping. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Required.. l 7.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services Step 1 2 3 Operation Configuring external Ethernet ports Configure internal Ethernet ports Creating Ethernet LAN services Remarks Required. configuring the CoS.1. Ltd. For details about the Layer 2 switching feature. Required when you need to set the port to the Spoke port.1q bridge are isolated from each other.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services. Optional. configuring the spanning tree protocol. Required. Optional. The services of different 802. Required. 5 6 7 Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Configuring the QoS NOTE l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually.6 Configuring 802. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. binding the CAR and CoS. Required. Table 7-5 Flow for configuring 802. 7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. configuring the CAR. Required. and modifying the aging time in the multicast table.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Table 7-4 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. Ltd. Optional. and configuring the traffic shaping. In the following example..1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. 7. 7-7 . see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. Optional. l 7. Required.2.2. 7. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. by using the NMS. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags. 7. configuring the spanning tree protocol. Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow.7 Configuring 802. For details. 5 6 7 8 Creating the VLAN filtering table Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Configuring the QoS NOTE l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually. binding the CAR and CoS. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.1. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. 7. configuring the CoS.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. For details about the QoS. 7. For details about the Layer 2 switching feature.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Step 4 Operation Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Remarks Required when you need to set the port to the Spoke port.2. configuring the CAR. and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. Required.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services The 802.4 Configuring NE2 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services are implemented based on the QinQ technology.2. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Figure 7-2 IDU board configuration EXT IF1A FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EFT4 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC 7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NE1 and NE2 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create point-to-point EPL services. by using the NMS. The service of User A need be isolated from the service of User B.2. 7. Board Configuration Information Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EFT4 board. In the following example. The Ethernet equipment of User A and User B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation. In the following example. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 7-1. A 20 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. A 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. NE1 and NE2 adopt the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram.2.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning.. The new service requirements are as follows: l l l l The two branches of User A that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. Ltd.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. Figure 7-1 Networking diagram User A1 NE 1 NE2 User A2 User B1 User B2 7. The two branches of User B that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. and does not support VLAN. 7-9 ..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 7-3 Configuring Ethernet services NE1:8-EFT4 PORT1 User A1 PORT2 User B1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15 NE2:8-EFT4 PORT1 User A2 PORT2 User B2 SDH Table 7-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control NE1 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Table 7-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol LCAS Enabled Bound Path NE1 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-15 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-15 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. After setting the parameters. click Apply. That is. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – l The EPL service of User B is as follows: – – 7. Ltd.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot NE1 5-IF1A-1 NE2 5-IF1A1-1 1#VC4 VC12:17-21 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-15 VC4-2:6-15 Add/Drop l The EPL service of User A is as follows: – Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.2.. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. The EFT4 board must be added. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services. 7-10 . Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. In the NE Explorer. Click the Basic Attributes tab. by using the NMS. 1. Select External Port.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. Ltd. a. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. a. Click the LCAS tab. click Apply. After setting the parameters. click Apply. 7-11 . In this example. Hence. In the NE Explorer. b. l Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled Auto-Negotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2 Description l l 2. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol 3. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. The mapping protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Paramete r Port Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. After setting the parameters. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. Select Internal Port. the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation. b. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Mapping Protocol is set to GFP. set this parameter to Enabled.. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. Then. select VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as the ports to be configured. c. click OK. select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. a. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5. Ltd. VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-15.. Click Create. In the NE Explorer. After setting the parameters. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. l Paramete r Configura ble Ports Level Service Direction If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. this parameter adopts the default value. In this example. Step 3 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. In Configurable Ports. b. 2. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. 1. 4. the LCAS function is enabled. In Available Bound Paths. As a result. the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. d. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VC12 Bidirectional VCTRUN K2 Description In this example.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Paramete r Enabling LCAS Value Range Enabled Description l l In this example. Then. the bound path is at the VC-12 level. VC4-2 is the available resource. In this example. Click Configuration. VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths. l Available Resources Available Timeslots VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-15 In this example. l Activation Status Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active. After setting the parameters. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 7-12 . Click the Bound Path tab. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. click OK. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. the 5-IF1A is the service source.1. In this example. the service sink is located in VC4-2.1. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21. In this example. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. 8-EFT4 VC4-2 1-5 Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. In this example.. In this example. Ltd. the 8-EFT4 is the service sink. this parameter adopts the default value. the 5-IF1A is the service source. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional. In this example. In this example.3–6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.1. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. this parameter adopts the default value. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e.g.3–6) 5-IF1A 22-31 In this example. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional.g. In this example.3–6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 17-21 In this example. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. 7-13 . The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1.g. In this example. Yes ----End 7.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. 7.3 Configuring NE1. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.3.2.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.. see 7. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . the service sink is located in VC4-2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. 7.3. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. by using the NMS.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. Ltd. In the following example.3.3. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. In the following example.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. 7. by using the NMS. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-15. 7.1. 7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the 8-EFT4 is the service sink. 7.3–6) Activate Immediately Value Range 8-EFT4 VC4-2 6-15 Description In this example.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning.3. by using the NMS. For details. In this example. 7. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. 2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. C2. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 7-6 IDU board configuration (NE1) EXT IF1A FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PD1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..3. Ltd. NE2. l l Figure 7-5 Networking diagram User C2 User C1 VLAN100-110 VLAN200-210 NE3 User C3 NE 1 NE2 7. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create PORTshared EVPL services. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 100 to 110. and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. In the following example. and supports VLAN. 7-15 . NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create PORT-shared EVPL services. The services of C2 and C3 require a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively. 16xE1 services exist between NE1. and NE3. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 200 to 210. NE1. The Ethernet equipment of C1. The new service requirements are as follows: l The headquarters C1 of User C are located at NE1 and the two branches of User C (C2 and C3) are located at NE2 and NE3. NE2. The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis As shown in Figure 7-5. and C3 provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation. Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Ltd.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 7-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3) EXT FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EFT4 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 7-8 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 NE1:8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10 PORT1 User C2 PORT1 User C1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:11-20 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10 NE3:8-EFT4 PORT1 User C3 SDH Table 7-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled Tag Aware Enabled NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled NE3 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled - 7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3–6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e..3–6) 8-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 100-110 VCRTUNK1 100-110 PORT1 200-210 VCTRUNK2 200-210 Private Line Service 2 Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot NE2 5-IF1A-1 NE1 5-IF1A1-1 7-IF1A1-1 NE3 5-IF1A1-1 1#VC4 VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-10 VC4-2:1-10 Add/Drop VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:1-10 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Table 7-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS TAG Entry Detection Bound Path NE1 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP VCTRUNK2 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP NE3 8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 GFP Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10 Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-11– VC12-20 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10 Table 7-10 Parameters of EPL services Parameter NE1 Private Line Service 1 Board Service Type Direction Source Port Source C-VLAN (e. 1.g. 7-17 . 1.g. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . set this parameter to Enabled. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. Set the basic attributes of PORT1. Select External Port. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services. 1. Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–20 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services. The EMS6 board must be added. 7-18 Click the TAG Attributes tab.. Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE3. Hence. The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. by using the NMS. The services of user C1 use PORT1.3. Ltd. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters. 3. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. click Apply. In the NE Explorer. click Apply. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l The EVPL service from C1 to C2 is as follows: – Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2. That is. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l 2. the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation. – l The EVPL service from C1 to C3 is as follows: – – 7.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. After setting the parameters. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In the NE Explorer. If TAG is set to Tag Aware. 1. the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Mapping Protocol is set to GFP. b. Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2 Description l l 2. l l Paramete r Port Enabling LCAS In this example. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. As a result. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. The services of user C1 use PORT1. a. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. Click the LCAS tab. 3. After setting the parameters. Select Internal Port. If TAG is set to Tag Aware. . After setting the parameters. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. TAG Tag Aware l l Entry Detection Enabled In this example. click Apply. In this example. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.. Ltd. b. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. 7-19 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set. a. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. click Apply. the LCAS function is enabled. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. d. In this example. 5. Ltd. VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths. Click the TAG Attributes tab. VC4-2 is the available resource. b. In this example. l Entry Detection Enabled In this example. the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. Click Configuration. l 7-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After setting the parameters. the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20. the bound path is at the VC-12 level. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VC12 Bidirectional VCTRUN K2 Description In this example. After setting the parameters. If TAG is set to Tag Aware. In Available Bound Paths. the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. this parameter adopts the default value. Then. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. c. Then. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In Configurable Ports. Parameter Port TAG Value Range VCTRUNK1 Tag Aware VCTRUNK2 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. Click the Bound Path tab.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. click OK. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-10. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . click Apply. select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware. l Available Resources Available Timeslots VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-10 VC12-11 to VC12-20 In this example. a. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. l Paramete r Configura ble Ports Level Service Direction If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. Click New. Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the sink services. PORT1 is the service source port. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. 1. After setting the parameters. 7-21 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Paramete r Activation Status Value Range Activated Description Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active. the VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. this parameter adopts the default value.. Ltd. In this example. l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows. . l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows.3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e. l Source Port PORT1 In this example. PORT1 is the service source port. In the NE Explorer. this parameter adopts the default value. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. click OK. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional.g. In this example. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. 1. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the source services. In this example. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. 1. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.g.3-6) PORT1 100-110 VCTRUNK1 100-110 In this example. Click Create.g.3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e. In this example. 2. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. the VCTRUNK2 is the service sink port. 7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the NE Explorer. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . this parameter adopts the default value. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. After setting the parameters.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Source VLAN (e.g. Ltd.3-6) Value Range 200-210 VCTRUNK2 200-210 Description The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the source services.g. the service sink is located in VC4-2. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Then.3– 6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 17-26 In this example. 1. In this example. In this example.1. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example.. In this example.g. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-10 In this example. In this example.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e. Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. the 5-IF1A is the service source. 1. The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the sink services. 1. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.1. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10. click OK. the service sink is located in VC4-2.3.g. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.1. see 7.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In this example. and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. Ltd. by using the NMS. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. Yes ----End 7. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 are point-to-point EPL services.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements.. In the following example. 7.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning.4. In this example.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.3– 6) Activate Immediately 7-IF1A 17-26 In this example. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. In this example.3 Configuring NE1.g. the 7-IF1A is the service source.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 11–20.1. For details. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e. 7. In this example. this parameter adopts the default value. 7-23 . 8-EMS6 VC4-2 11-20 In this example. l l l Figure 7-10 Networking diagram User D1 NE 1 NE2 User D2 12 User E1 User E2 7. The Ethernet equipment of User D and User E provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning. 7.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning.4.4.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram.4. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.. Ltd. by using the NMS. The two branches of User E are located at NE1 and NE2. however. In the following example. by using the NMS.4. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. is supplementary to each other.4. 7. 16xE1 services exist between NE1 and NE2. and need to communicate with each other. NE1 and NE2 need to use Ethernet switching boards to create VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. 7. and need to communicate with each other.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7. The traffic of User D and User E. 7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and thus can share the 20 Mbit/s bandwidth. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . In the following example. and does not support VLAN. The new service requirements are as follows: l The two branches of User D are located at NE1 and NE2. The services of User D need to be isolated from the services of User E. As shown in Figure 7-10. NE1 and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. Figure 7-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2) EXT FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 7-12 Configuring Ethernet services NE1:8-EMS6 PORT1 User D1 PORT2 User E1 EPL1 VCTRUNK1 NE2:8-EMS6 EPL1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10 PORT1 User D2 PORT2 User E2 EPL2 VC4-2:VC12:1-10 EPL2 SDH Table 7-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection Default VLAN ID Issue 02 (2009-06-15) NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 100 PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 200 NE2 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 100 PORT2 Enabled AutoNegotiation 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 200 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Board Configuration Information Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EMS6 board.. 7-25 . 3–6) 8-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 100 PORT2 200 EPL Service 2 NE2 EPL Service 1 8-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 100 PORT2 200 EPL Service 2 VCRTUNK1 100 VCRTUNK1 200 VCTRUNK2 100 VCTRUNK2 200 7-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.g. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .3–6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter VLAN Priority NE1 0 0 NE2 0 0 Table 7-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS TAG Entry Detection Bound Path NE1 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10 NE2 8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 GFP Enabled Tag Aware Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10 Table 7-13 Parameters of EPL services Parameter NE1 EPL Service 1 Board Service Type Direction Source Port Source CVLAN (e. 1.. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l 2. The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. After setting the parameters.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. l Enabled/ Disabled Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services. The EMS6 board must be added. Ltd. by using the NMS. Click the Basic Attributes tab. set this parameter to Enabled. 7-27 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . click Apply. In the NE Explorer. Select External Port. 1. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l 7. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.4. That is.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot NE1 5-IF1A-1 NE2 5-IF1A1-1 1#VC4 VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10 Add/Drop 8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10 l The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services of User D and User E occupy VC-12 timeslots 17– 26 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2. The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2. VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE2 are used to add/ drop the services.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd. 1. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation. l TAG Access If TAG is set to Access: l The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. click Apply. Hence. b. After setting the parameters. Click the TAG Attributes tab. The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. Value Range VCTRUNK 1 GFP Description l l 2. a. In the NE Explorer. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. Mapping Protocol is set to GPF. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1. In this example.. l Default VLAN ID 100 200 l l Entry Detection Enabled In this example.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Working Mode Value Range Auto-Negotiation Description The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. click Apply. In this example. In this example. The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2. After setting the parameters. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. Parameter Port Mapping Protocol 7-28 The encapsulation protocol of VCTRUNK1 needs to be set. 3. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2. the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. After setting the parameters. Click the Bound Path tab. Then. l Entry Detection Enabled In this example. Click the LCAS tab. In Configurable Ports. a. Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1. a. Click Configuration. After setting the parameters. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNK. VCTRUNK1 needs to be bound with VC paths. d. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. b. the bound path is at the VC-12 level.. click Apply. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters. l If TAG is set to Tag Aware. Ltd. Value Range VCTRUNK1 VC12 Description In this example. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. If TAG is set to Tag Aware. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be bound. the LCAS function is enabled. Paramete r Configura ble Ports Level Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. b. the packets that carry VLAN tags are received. l l Parameter Port Enabling LCAS In this example. click OK. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. Value Range VCTRUN K1 Enabled Description In this example. 4. In Available Bound Paths. Then.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 3. the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. 7-29 . In this example. click Apply. 5. c. Parameter Port TAG Value Range VCTRUNK1 Tag Aware Description The tag attributes of VCTRUNK1 need to be set. After setting the parameters. l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. In this example. In this example. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. l Available Resources Available Timeslots VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-10 In this example. VC4-2 is the available resource.g. In this example. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. Click New.3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e. this parameter adopts the default value. 2. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.g. 1. l Activation Status Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active. 1. VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Paramete r Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. this parameter adopts the default value. Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service.3-6) PORT1 100 VCTRUNK1 100 In this example. PORT1 is the service source port. click OK. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. In the NE Explorer. 7-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-10. Ltd. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. 1. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e. select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. In this example.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 5-IF1A 17-26 In this example. Click Create. the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. 1.g.1. Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.g. the service sink is located in VC4-2. l Parameter Level Direction When Direction is set to Bidirectional. In this example. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. Click OK. Then. Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. Ltd. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service. 7-31 . In this example. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. this parameter adopts the default value. In this example. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. Parameter Service Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26. In this example. the 5-IF1A is the service source. VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port. this parameter adopts the default value. 1.g. In this example..3-6) PORT2 200 VCTRUNK1 200 In this example.3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT2 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. PORT2 is the service source port. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. In the NE Explorer. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. 2. . NE1. by using the NMS. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10. As shown in Figure 7-14. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 16xE1 services exist between NE1.5.5.g.3– 6) Activate Immediately Value Range 1-10 Description In this example.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning.5.3 Configuring NE1.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.5 Configuration Example (802. NE2. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning. For details. In the following example. Ltd. NE2. 7. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 7. The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning. 7.1. In the following example. 7.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .5. and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.4. The new service requirements are as follows: 7-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4. by using the NMS. 7.5. see 7. by using the NMS. and NE3. Yes ----End 7. 7. and supports VLAN. and thus a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. which are F1.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which the user VLAN is not defined. of which the working mode is auto-negotiation. l Figure 7-14 Networking diagram NE2 User F2 NE 1 User F1 NE3 User F3 7. Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. NE2 and NE3 need to be configured with Ethernet transparent transmission boards. are located at NE1. Communication is not required between F2 and F3. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. The Ethernet equipment of User F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports. NE2. 7-33 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis The three branches of User F.5. and F3. and NE3. In the following example. NE1 needs to be configured with Ethernet switching boards. F2.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. Figure 7-15 IDU board configuration (NE1) EXT IF1A FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PD1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. the 802. F1 need communicate with F2 and F3. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. The VLAN ID and the number of the VLANs are unknown and may be changed. Ltd.. .7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 7-16 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3) EXT FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EFT4 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 7-17 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 NE1:8-EMS6 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 PORT1 User F2 PORT1 User F1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-10 NE3:8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VB1 PORT1 User F3 SDH Table 7-14 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control Entry Detection NE1 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled Disabled NE2 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled NE3 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled - Table 7-15 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter Port 7-34 NE1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 NE2 VCTRUNK1 NE3 VCTRUNK1 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1d IVL/Ingress Filter Enable PORT1. Ltd.. VCTRUNK2 Hub Spoke Spoke Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-18 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot NE2 5-IF1A-1 NE1 5-IF1A1-1 7-IF1A1-1 NE3 5-IF1A1-1 1#VC4 VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 Add/Drop VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 8-EMS6 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:6-15 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Encapsulation Mapping Protocol Enabling LCAS Entry Detection Bound Path NE1 GFP GFP NE2 GFP NE3 GFP Enabled Disabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5 Enabled Disabled VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-10 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5 Enabled VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5 Table 7-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter Board VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode VB Mount Port Hub/Spoke PORT1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 Ethernet LAN services of NE1 8-EMS VB1 802. 7-35 . VCTRUNK1. The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. by using the NMS.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis l OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The Ethernet LAN service of User F occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. After setting the parameters.5. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the TAG Attributes tab. . 1. click Apply. VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE2. The services of user F1 use PORT1. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l 2. the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked. In the NE Explorer. VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE3. l l 7. Select External Port. That is. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. Entry Detection Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.. Hence. The services of user F1 use PORT1. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. click Apply. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 7-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After setting the parameters. 3. The EMS6 board must be added. the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation. set this parameter to Enabled. Ltd. As a result. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After setting the parameters. Ltd. b.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. click Apply.. Paramete r Port Mapping Protocol The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. the LCAS function is enabled. b. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRUN K2 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. After setting the parameters. In this example. a. the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked. After setting the parameters. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Select Internal Port. click Apply. If Entry Detection is set to Disabled. 1. 7-37 . click Apply. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. Mapping Protocol is set to GFP. In the NE Explorer. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. Click the TAG Attributes tab. l l Paramete r Port Enabling LCAS In this example. Click the LCAS tab. a. Parameter Port Entry Detection Value Range VCTRUNK1 Disabled VCTRUNK2 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. 3. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. 5. Value Range VCTRUN K1 GFP VCTRU NK2 Description l l 2. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. 4. Set the parameters of VCTRCUNK1 and VCTRCUNK2. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. In this example. In this example. Click the Bound Path tab. an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created. the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. l Available Resources Available Timeslots VC4-2 VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-10 In this example. click OK. d. select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured. In the NE Explorer. 3. Then. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. b.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) a. c. VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths. this parameter adopts the default value.1d SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802. After setting the parameters. Click Configuration. In Configurable Ports. Ltd. 2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 7-38 . l Paramete r Configura ble Ports Level Service Direction If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. l Activation Status Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 are active. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. 1. In this example. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. a transparent bridge is created. In this example. After setting the parameters. l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5.1d) Description In this example. the bound path is at the VC-12 level. VB Name is set to VB1. Parameter VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Value Range VB1 802. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Value Range VCTRUN K1 VC12 Bidirectional VCTRUN K2 Description In this example.. click OK. Then. Click Configure Mount. VC4-2 is the available resource. In Available Bound Paths. Set the parameters as follows. and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each port need not be checked. Click New. VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-10. VCTRUNK1. Step 4 Modify the mounted port of bridge. Paramet er Mount Port Value Range PORT1 VCTRUN K1 VCTRUN K2 Description l Select PORT1. Only the port that is selected as Mount Port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge. Value Range PORT1. 2. Click the Service Mount tab. and VCTRUNK2 as the mount ports. and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge. l Hub/ Spoke Hub Spoke Spoke The Spoke ports cannot access each other. Select the created bridge. After setting the parameters. click OK. select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create. VCTRUNK1. VCTRUNK2 Description PORT1. After setting the parameters. Click OK. 2.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter selected forwarding ports 4. Parameter Level Value Range VC12 Description In this example. In the NE Explorer. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. 7-39 . 1. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Ltd. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Indicates that the VCTRUNK is active. Activatio n Status Activated Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. The Hub ports can access each other. In the NE Explorer. VCTRUNK1. 1. Then. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Apply. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other.. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Direction Value Range Bidirectional Description l When Direction is set to Bidirectional.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.1. the service sink is located in VC4-2. this parameter adopts the default value. Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example.g.g.g. In this example. In this example. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-5 In this example. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. the 7-IF1A is the service source. In this example.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 7-IF1A 17-21 In this example. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.3– 6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 17-21 In this example. In this example. . Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.1. the 5-IF1A is the service source. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 7-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. this parameter adopts the default value. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e.. In this example. Ltd. In this example. the service sink is located in VC4-2. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 In this example. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. In this example. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. 6. Yes ----End 7.6. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.6 Configuration Example (802. 7.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. 7..3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the 802. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-10. and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6. Ltd. 7.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning. 7. and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. by using the NMS. In the following example.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. NE2. In the following example.1.5.6.3 Configuring NE1. 7. 7-41 . NE2. As shown in Figure 7-19. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802. 7.6.3– 6) Activate Immediately Value Range 6-10 Description In this example. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. by using the NMS. For details. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 16xE1 services exist between NE1. and NE3.2.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e. NE1.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. by using the NMS. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service.g. see 7. 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis l l l l OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The three branches of User G are located at NE1. and NE3 respectively. NE2. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create Ethernet LAN services. Figure 7-19 Networking diagram NE2 User G2 User G1 NE 1 User H2 User H1 NE3 User G3 User H3 7. and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth. and does not support VLAN. Figure 7-20 IDU board configuration (NE1) EXT IF1A FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EMS6 EXT EXT PD1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC 7-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NE2. The service of User G need be isolated from the service of User H. NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create Ethernet LAN services. Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. and NE3 respectively. The Ethernet equipment of User G and User H provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation. the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. and share a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth. need form a LAN. The three branches of User H are located at NE1.. In the following example.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. need form a LAN. Ltd. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .6. 7-43 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Figure 7-21 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3) EXT FAN FAN Slot 20 Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1 EXT EFT4 EXT EXT PH1 SCC SCC Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2 EXT IF1A PXC PXC PXC PXC Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the networking diagram. you can plan the configuration diagram and parameters of the Ethernet services on the two VLANs that are implemented by using the 802..1q network bridge. Figure 7-22 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1 NE1:8-EMS6 VLAN 100 PORT1 User G1 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-10 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15 PORT1 User G2 PORT2 User H2 VLAN 200 PORT2 User H1 VCTRUNK3 VC4-2:VC12:11-20 VCTRUNK4 VC4-2:VC12:21-30 VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15 NE3:8-EFT4 PORT1 User G3 PORT2 User H3 VB1 SDH Table 7-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Paramete r Board Port Enabled/ Disabled NE1 8-EMS6 PORT1 Enabled PORT2 Enabled NE2 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled PORT2 Enabled NE3 8-EFT4 PORT1 Enabled PORT2 Enabled Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. . Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Paramete r Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG Entry Detection Default VLAN ID VLAN Priority NE1 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 NE2 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 NE3 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 AutoNegotiatio n 1522 Disabled Access Enabled 100 0 Disabled Access Enabled 200 0 Disabled - Disabled - Disabled - Disabled - Table 7-18 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Param eter Board Port Encaps ulation Mappin g Protoco l Enablin g LCAS TAG Entry Detecti on NE1 8-EMS6 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP VCTR UNK3 GFP VCTR UNK4 GFP NE2 8-EFT4 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP NE3 8-EFT4 VCTR UNK1 GFP VCTR UNK2 GFP Enable d Access Enable d Enable d Access Enable d Enable d Access Enable d Enable d Access Enable d Enable d - Enable d - Enable d - Enable d - 7-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Param eter Default VLAN ID VLAN Priority Bound Path NE1 100 100 200 200 NE2 - NE3 - 0 VC4-2: VC121– VC125 0 VC4-2: VC126– VC1210 0 VC4-2: VC1211– VC1220 0 VC4-2: VC1221– VC1230 VC4-2: VC121– VC125 VC4-2: VC126– VC1215 VC4-2: VC121– VC125 VC4-2: VC126– VC1215 Table 7-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter Board VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Mount Port VLAN Filtering Table Filtering Table VLAN ID Forwarding Port Ethernet LAN services of NE1 8-EMS VB1 802.. VCTRUNK4 VLAN Filtering Table 1 100 PORT1. VCTRUNK3. VCTRUNK3. VCTRUNK1. VCTRUNK2. PORT2. VCTRUNK1. Ltd. VCTRUNK2 VLAN Filtering Table 2 200 PORT2.1q IVL/Ingress Filter Enable PORT1. 7-45 . VCTRUNK4 Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-23 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot NE2 5-IF1A-1 NE1 5-IF1A1-1 7-IF1A1-1 NE3 5-IF1A1-1 1#VC4 VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:6-15 Add/Drop VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:21-30 VC4-2:6-15 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.. The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. Uses VC-12 timeslots 21–30 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE3. set this parameter to Enabled. l Enabled/ Disabled 7-46 Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services.6. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2. Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/ drop services between NE1 and NE3. After setting the parameters. by using the NMS. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l 2. click Apply. Click the Basic Attributes tab. – – l The Ethernet LAN service of User H: – – – 7. Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services between NE1 and NE2.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the 802. Ltd. Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE2. Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l The Ethernet LAN service of User G: – Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3. Select External Port. That is. 1. The EMS6 board must be added.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. . In the NE Explorer. b. Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 PORT2 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set. and VCTRUNK4. Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1. a. VCTRUNK2. the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation. 3. If TAG is set to Access. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. If TAG is set to Access. . select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. 1. In this example. The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2.. l TAG Access l l Default VLAN ID 100 200 l l Entry Detection Enabled In this example. click Apply. VCTRUNK3. After setting the parameters. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. Select Internal Port. In this example. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description l 2. Hence. After setting the parameters. Param eter Port The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1. click Apply. Ltd. In the NE Explorer.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Working Mode Value Range Auto-Negotiation Description The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. 7-47 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. click Apply. After setting the parameters. After setting the parameters. VCTRUNK2. Value Range VCTRU NK1 Enabled VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1.. Mapping Protocol is set to GFP. the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority and are then received. a. the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. Click the LCAS tab. l TAG If TAG is set to Access. Param eter Port Value Range VCTRU NK1 Access VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1. Click the TAG Attributes tab. l Param eter Port Enabli ng LCAS In this example. If TAG is set to Access. and VCTRUNK4. b. VCTRUNK3. As a result. VCTRUNK2. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. 3.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Param eter Mappi ng Protoc ol Value Range GFP Description l In this example. VCTRUNK3. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. l 4. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . click Apply. l 7-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the LCAS function is enabled. Ltd. and VCTRUNK4. 7-49 . After setting the parameters. VCTRUNK1. l Param eter Config urable Ports Level Service Directi on VC12 Bidirectional If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional. Then. and VCTRUNK4 are used to bind VC paths. l Availa ble Resour ces VC4-2 In this example. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. c. d. In this example. In Configurable Ports. VCTRUNK2. 5. VCTRUNK3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Param eter Entry Detecti on Value Range Enabled Description In this example. b. Value Range VCTRU NK1 VCTRU NK2 VCTR UNK3 VCTRU NK4 Description In this example. In this example. Then. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. Ltd. Click Configuration. the bound path is at the VC-12 level. Click the Bound Path tab. click OK. VC4-2 is the available resource.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this parameter adopts the default value. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In Available Bound Paths. select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured. a. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. 1q) Description In this example. 3. VCTRUNK1. Set the parameters as follows. VCTRUNK2.1q bridge is created. 7-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1q IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802. If the ingress filter is enabled. VCTRUNK3. 1. In this example.. Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table. 4. click OK. and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge. Parameter selected forwarding ports Value Range PORT1. VCTRUNK2. PORT2.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Param eter Availa ble Timesl ots Value Range VC12-1 to VC12-5 VC12-6 to VC12-1 0 VC1211 to VC1220 VC12-2 1 to VC12-3 0 Description l VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5. In the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . the packet is discarded. PORT2. VCTRUNK2. VCTRUNK4 is bound with timeslots VC12-21 to VC12-30. VB Name is set to VB1. and VCTRUNK4 are active. VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-10. the VLAN tags are checked at the ingress port. 2. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table. Parameter VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Value Range VB1 802. VCTRUNK4 Description PORT1. VCTRUNK3 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20. Click Configure Mount. Click New. an IEEE 802. VCTRUNK3. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. VCTRUNK3. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Click OK. VCTRUNK1. l l l Activat ion Status Activated Indicates that VCTRUNK1. Ltd. After setting the parameters. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. Click Create. VCTRUNK4 Description PORT2. select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.3-6) selected forwarding ports Value Range 200 PORT2. After setting the parameters. Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 2 as follows. Click the VLAN Filtering tab. VCTRUNK2 Description PORT1. In the NE Explorer. the 5-IF1A is the service source. and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge. Parameter VLAN ID(e. 1.g: 1. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.3-6) selected forwarding ports Value Range 100 PORT1. click OK. l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.g: 1. VCTRUNK3. Ltd. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. VCTRUNK1. Parameter VLAN ID(e. VCTRUNK1. In this example. VCTRUNK3. In the NE Explorer.. After setting the parameters. click OK. Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 1. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 1 as follows. Select the created bridge. this parameter adopts the default value. 7-51 . and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge. Then. 2. l Source 5-IF1A In this example. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .g. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. Ltd.1.3– 6) Activate Immediately 7-IF1A 17-21 In this example. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 6-10 In this example. In this example. In this example. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. the service sink is located in VC4-2. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.1. Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK3 as follows. In this example. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21..1. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-10. 7-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows.g.3– 6) Activate Immediately Value Range 17-21 Description In this example. this parameter adopts the default value.g.g. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5. In this example. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 1-5 In this example. In this example.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.1.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Source Timeslot Range(e. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21. In this example. the 7-IF1A is the service source. the service sink is located in VC4-2. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. 8-EMS6 VC4-2 11-20 In this example. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31. 7-53 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In this example. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 11-20.1. the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31. In this example. In this example.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. the 5-IF1A is the service source. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. the 8-EMS6 is the service sink. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e. l When Direction is set to Bidirectional. this parameter adopts the default value.1.1. .g. create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source. In this example.g. In this example. Yes l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK4 as follows. In this example. the service sink is located in VC4-2. this parameter adopts the default value.3– 6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. the 7-IF1A is the service source. Parameter Level Direction Value Range VC12 Bidirectional Description In this example. Ltd. l Source Source Timeslot Range(e.3– 6) Activate Immediately 5-IF1A 22-31 In this example.3– 6) Sink Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 7-IF1A 22-31 In this example. 8-EMS6 In this example. 6. and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. In this example. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning.3 Configuring NE1. see 7. For details.1.3– 6) Activate Immediately Value Range VC4-2 21-30 Description In this example. by using the NMS. the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 21-30. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. 7-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.g. the service sink is located in VC4-2.7 Configuring SDH/PDH Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.2. Yes ----End 7. Delivers the configured cross-connection to NEs immediately. when configuring Hybrid microwave-based Ethernet services. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Ethernet services are accessed through the Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2. 8. or are accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2.. 8. Configuring the services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and configuring the accessed Ethernet services. 8-1 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis About This Chapter You need not configure the mapping relations between the services and the VCTRUNKs or the cross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and the line timeslots.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid microwave.1 Configuration Flows The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . l This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the EMS6 board that is used to access the user services.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then transmitted to the IFH2 board.1 Configuration Flows The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through the Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2.. 8.1.1 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then transmitted to the IFH2 board.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8.1. l 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2 Configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board Configuring the external port of an Ethernet board Required. This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board so that the IFH2 board can interconnect with the EMS6 board through this Ethernet port. 8. The IFH2 board provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services. This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the EMS6 board so that the EMS6 board can interconnect with the IFH2 board through this Ethernet port. The IFH2 board. Table 8-1 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board Step 1 Operation Configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board Configuring the external port of an Ethernet board Remarks Required. or are accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2. supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the CoS. Ltd. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. 8. however.1. Configuring the services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and configuring the accessed Ethernet services. configuring the CoS. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. configuring the spanning tree protocol.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services. l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Required when you need to configure Ethernet LAN services. For details about the link aggregation group.1q bridge. and modifying the aging time in the multicast table.. Required when you need to create the 802. Ltd. The only difference is that you need to configure the external port during the configuration of the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board. For details about the QoS. Required when you need to set Hub/Spoke Attribute to Spoke.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Step Operation Creating Ethernet private line services Creating Ethernet LAN services Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Creating the VLAN filtering table Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Configuring the QoS Remarks Required when you need to configure Ethernet private line services. In both the configuration scenarios. Optional. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. Optional. For details about the QinQ. and configuring the traffic shaping. Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow. thus isolating the communication between different ports. Required when the Hybrid microwave uses the IF 1+1 protection. but you need to configure the internal port (VCTRUNK) during the configuration of the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. you need not configure the Ethernet cross-connections. 8-3 . For details about the Layer 2 switching feature. The configurations in Step 2 do not include the configuration of QinQ-based EVPL services and the configuration of 802. Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the entries of the MAC address table manually. 3 Configuring the 1+1 protection for the Ethernet services in the Hybrid microwave Creating a link aggregation group NOTE l The procedure for configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board (described in Step 2) is similar to the procedure for configuring the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. configuring the CAR. binding the CAR and CoS. .3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. 2 Configuring the CoS Optional. In the following example. supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . NOTE For details about the CoS.2. 8. 8. In the following example.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. The IFH2 board. Ltd.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the CoS. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. 8.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid microwave. The IFH2 board provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services. This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board that is used to access the user services. 8. Table 8-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board Step 1 Operation Configuring the external Ethernet port of an Ethernet board Remarks Required. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8.2. however. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. In the following example.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.1. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable and the VLAN priority level is 7. Ltd. User B has two branches (user B1 and B2). tagged frames.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis 8. The services of user A are frames that do not carry VLAN tags. One part of the Ethernet services are VoIP services. whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. User C has two branches. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly and the VLAN priority level is 1. There are 2xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches.. The other part of the Ethernet services are Internet services. 8. The service requirements are as follows: l The Ethernet equipment of user A.2. 8-5 . whose maximum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s. which are located at NE1 and NE2. whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. the default VLAN ID of 300 is added to the services. User A has two branches (user A1 and user A2). There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The VLAN ID is 100. which are located at NE1 and NE2. untagged framed. namely. There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable. 8. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. NE1 and NE2 use the IDU 620 and NE3 uses the IDU 605. whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s.2.2.2.7 Configuring NE3 You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning. by using the NMS.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. One part of the Ethernet services are voice over IP (VoIP) services. After the user services are accessed. Hence. In the following example. The other part of the Ethernet services are Internet services. user B. The Ethernet services are Internet services.2. whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The radio link between NE1 and NE2 uses the 1+1 HSB configuration. by using the NMS. by using the NMS. namely. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. In the network shown in Figure 8-1. The Ethernet equipment of user A does not support VLAN tags. and user C provides 100 Mbit/s auto-negotiative Ethernet electrical interfaces. the services of user B and user C are frames that carry VLAN tags. The VLAN ID is 200.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling. The Ethernet equipment of user B and user C supports VLAN tags. l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. 8. which are located at NE2 and NE3. 2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. In the following example.2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Configuration Information of Ethernet Parameters Figure 8-2 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters NE1: 5-IFH2 (main) NE1: NE1: 6-EMS6 PORT3 (main) User A1 User B1 PORT1 15-ODU (main) PORT1 NE2: 5-IFH2 NE2: (main) 15-ODU (main) PORT1 PORT3 (main) NE2: 6-EMS6 PORT1 LAG PORT2 PORT4 (slave) PORT1 LAG PORT2 User A2 User B2 NE1: 17-ODU (standby) NE2: 17-ODU (standby) PORT4 (slave) PORT1 NE1: 7-IFH2 (standby) Network cable IF cable NE2: 7-IFH2 (standby) 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs.. Ltd.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Figure 8-1 Networking diagram User A2 User A1 User C2 NE2 (IDU 620) NE1 (IDU 620) User B1 User B2 User C1 NE3 (IDU 605 1F) 8. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 8-7 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Table 8-3 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Maximum Frame Length Flow Control TAG NE1 6-EMS6 PORT1–PORT4 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300) PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware Entry Detection Enabled NE2 6-EMS6 PORT1–PORT4 Enabled Auto-Negotiation 1522 Disabled PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300) PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware Enabled Table 8-4 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board Parameter Board Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Flow Control NE1 5-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled 7-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled NE2 5-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled 7-IFH2 Enabled AutoNegotiation Disabled Table 8-5 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1) Parameter NE1 Private Line Service 1 (User A1) Board Service Type Service Direction Source Port 6-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 Private Line Service 2 (User B1. Internet Service) Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. VoIP Service) Private Line Service 3 (User B1.. Internet Service NE2 User A2 User B2. VoIP Service User B1.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter NE1 Private Line Service 1 (User A1) Private Line Service 2 (User B1.3-6) 300 PORT3 300 Table 8-6 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2) Parameter NE2 Private Line Service 1 (User A2) Board Service Type Service Direction Source Port Source C-VLAN (e. 1. 1.3-6) 6-EMS EPL Bidirectional PORT1 300 PORT3 300 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 100 PORT3 100 EPL Bidirectional PORT2 200 PORT3 200 Private Line Service 2 (User B2.g. 1. Internet Service) Configuration Information of the QoS Table 8-7 Flow configuration Paramet er NE1 User A1 User B1. VoIP Service) Private Line Service 3 (User B2.. 1.g. VoIP Service User B2.g. Internet Service Board 6-EMS 6-EMS 8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e.g. Ltd.3-6) Sink Port Sink C-VLAN (e. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Internet Service) 200 PORT3 200 Source C-VLAN (e. VoIP Service) 100 PORT3 100 Private Line Service 3 (User B1. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Paramet er NE1 User A1 User B1. Table 8-9 Parameters of the CoS Parameter Board CoS ID CoS Type Issue 02 (2009-06-15) NE1 6-EMS 1 simple 2 simple 3 simple NE2 6-EMS 1 simple 2 simple 3 simple 8-9 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. VoIP Service PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 100 – 1 User B1. Internet Service PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 200 2 2 Flow Type Port VLAN ID Bound CAR Bound CoS PORT +VLAN Flow PORT1 300 1 3 PORT +VLAN Flow PORT1 300 1 3 Table 8-8 Parameters of the CARa Parameter Board CAR ID Enabled/Disabled NE1 6-EMS 1 Enabled 2 Enabled 20480 0 40960 0 NE2 6-EMS 1 Enabled 10240 0 20480 0 2 Enabled 20480 0 40960 0 Committed Information Rate (kbit/ 10240 s) Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 20480 0 NOTE a: You can limit the Ethernet service rate on a port of the EMS6 board. by performing the corresponding configuration of the CAR that is bound with the port. VoIP Service PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 100 – 1 User B2. Internet Service PORT +VLAN Flow PORT2 200 2 2 NE2 User A2 User B2. .. Ltd. 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter CoS Priority NE1 7 3 2 NE2 7 3 2 Configuration Information of the Link Aggregation Group Table 8-10 Parameters of the link aggregation group Parameter Board LAG No. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd. Figure 8-3 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3 NE2: 8-IFH2 NE2: 18-ODU User C2 PORT1 NE3: 8-IFH1 NE3: 18-ODU NE3: 5-EMS4 PORT1 User C1 Network cable IF cable 8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram.2. LAG Name LAG Type Load Sharing Main Port Selected Slave Ports NE1 6-EMS 1 LAG_1 Manual Non-Sharing PORT3 PORT4 NE2 6-EMS 1 LAG_1 Manual Non-Sharing PORT3 PORT4 8. In the following example.. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 8-11 . by using the NMS. Ltd.1d SVL/Ingress Filter Disable PORT1. IFUP1 8. You must be logged in to the NE. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.2. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Table 8-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter Board Port Enabled/Disabled Working Mode Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode NE2 8-IFH2 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation Enable Symmetric Flow Control NE3 5-EMS4 PORT1 Enabled Auto-Negotiation Disabled Table 8-12 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2) CoS Parameter User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag CoS Priority 3 1 Table 8-13 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3) Parameter Board VB Name VB Type Bridge Switch Mode Mount Port Ethernet LAN Service 5-EMS4 VB1 802.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The EMS6 board must be added.4 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning. That is. select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The IFH2 board must be added. the port works in autonegotiation mode. the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. l NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l l Disabled l l Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. click Apply. set this parameter to Enabled. 3. 8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l 2. In this example. Ltd. In this example. Select External Port. After setting the flow control mode of the port. In this example. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. 1. 1. The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. Select External Port. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 2. After setting the basic attributes of the port. The user services use PORT1. The user services use PORT1. In this example. After setting the basic attributes of the ports. In this example. In the NE Explorer.. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board. click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set. In the NE Explorer. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Click the Flow Control tab. this parameter adopts the default value. Click the Basic Attributes tab. click Apply. this parameter adopts the default value. l l Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. and PORT4 need to be set. Ltd. l l NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l l Disabled l l 4. After setting the flow control mode of the ports. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT2. the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. After setting the parameters. and PORT4 need to be set. In this example. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. PORT3. set this parameter to Enabled. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. 8-13 . the port works in autonegotiation mode. and PORT4 need to be set. PORT2. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Click the Flow Control tab.. In this example. 3. PORT3. click Apply. In this example. PORT3. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1. PORT2. click Apply. In this example. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1. this parameter adopts the default value. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. In this example. l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. this parameter adopts the default value. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. l l If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l l Default VLAN ID Entry Detection 300 Enabled In this example. The packets that carry VLAN tags are received. click OK. In this example. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.g.. Ltd. l In this example. In this example. Then. 8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. 2. In this example. this parameter adopts the default value. The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. In the NE Explorer. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional. the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. Parameter Service Type Service Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service.1. PORT3 is the service sink port. this parameter adopts the default value. Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1. set this parameter to EPL. 3-6) Sink Port PORT1 300 PORT3 In this example. Then. TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2– PORT4. l Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. In this example. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Click New. The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter TAG Value Range l Description If TAG is set to Access: l In this example. The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. 3. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . PORT1 is the service source port. TAG is set to Access for PORT1. The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service. 1. g. In this example.1.g. Parameter Service Type Service Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service. 3-6) Value Range 300 Description The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service.1. PORT3 is the service sink port.g. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional..1. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional.g. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service. . In this example.1. set this parameter to EPL. 3-6) PORT2 100 PORT3 100 In this example.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Sink VLAN (e. PORT2 is the service source port. In this example. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e. this parameter adopts the default value. Ltd. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows. PORT3 is the service sink port. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows.1. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service.g. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e. 3-6) Issue 02 (2009-06-15) PORT2 200 PORT3 200 In this example. l Source Port Source VLAN (e. PORT2 is the service source port. the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In this example. set this parameter to EPL. this parameter adopts the default value. 8-15 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l In the NE Explorer. PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example. the source VLAN ID is 100. In this example. Create the flow. 1. Port VLAN ID PORT1 300 l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. In this example. Set the parameters of the three flows. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Click the Flow Configuration tab. the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. c. Port VLAN ID PORT2 100 l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows. Then. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow. In this example. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow. the source VLAN ID is 300. b. the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow..8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A1 as follows: Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow. Click New. In this example. click OK. a. Ltd. In this example. 8-16 Create the CAR. the source VLAN ID is 200. Port VLAN ID PORT2 200 2. PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. l In the NE Explorer. the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR. CAR1 is enabled. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. 8-17 . CAR 2 is enabled. l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows. Select the parameters of the two CARs. Click New. Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate(kbit/s) 0 In this example. which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. c. Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 In this example. these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the CIR is 10240 kbit/s. Ltd. l l In this example.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis a. b.. When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR. these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 1 Enabled 10240 Description In this example. the MBS is 0. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. click OK. In this example. 20480 l l In this example. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Value Range 2 Enabled Description In this example. the CBS is 0. CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. the PIR is 20480 kbit/s. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR. In this example. Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Click the CAR Configuration tab. Then. Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. Then. Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 3. When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. 8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. the PIR is 40960 kbit/s. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple.. The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue. Ltd. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR. which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate(kbit/s) 0 In this example. CoS Priority 7 l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B1 as follows. the CBS is 0. all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. Create the CoS. CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. Click New.. the CIR is 20480 kbit/s. b. the MBS is 0. In the NE Explorer. these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. c. 40960 l l In this example. l 0 In this example.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 20480 Description l l In this example. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 1 simple Description In this example. click OK. Click the CoS Configuration tab. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple. 100. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 3 simple Description In this example. CoS Priority 3 l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A1 as follows. CoS Priority 2 4. the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows. all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. After setting the parameters.. b.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 2 simple Description In this example. CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. and 200. The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300. Bind the CAR/CoS. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. Value Range PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 Description In this example. a. Ltd. Paramet er Port Flow Type PORT +VLAN Flow PORT +VLAN Flow PORT +VLAN Flow VLAN ID 300 100 200 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). Click the Flow Configuration tab. 8-19 . In the NE Explorer. CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. click OK. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple. 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Paramet er Bound CAR Bound CoS Value Range 1 2 Description The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR. LAG No. In this example. 1. The user creates the LAG manually. a hot backup scheme is provided. PORT3 is the main port. PORT4 is the slave port.5 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning. LAG Name is set to LAG_1.2. 8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. In this example. according to the service plan. Then. The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. according to the service plan. In the NE Explorer. LAG Name LAG Type Load Sharing Non-Sharing Main Port Selected Slave Ports PORT3 PORT4 ----End 8. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Parameter LAG No. 3 1 2 Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board. click OK. Ltd. is set to 1.. 2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . In this example. The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Value Range 1 LAG_1 Manual Description In this example. Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port. In this case. 3. After setting the parameters. by using the NMS. Click New. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. . You must be logged in to the NE. click Apply. Select External Port. The EMS6 board must be added. the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. 1. select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. In this example. the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. click Apply. In this example. In the NE Explorer. In this example. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l l 2. The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The IFH2 board must be added. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 3. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set. Select External Port. 1. the port works in autonegotiation mode. 8-21 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . In this example. The user services use PORT1. l NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l l Disabled l l Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. Ltd. After setting the basic attributes of the port. Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services. In this example. Click the Flow Control tab. this parameter adopts the default value. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this parameter adopts the default value. The user services use PORT1. That is. In the NE Explorer. set this parameter to Enabled. After setting the flow control mode of the port. 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. l l Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode Enabled AutoNegotiation In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode. 3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l l NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode Disabled l l Disabled l l 4. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter Port Value Range PORT1–PORT4 Description l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set. The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2. PORT3 and PORT4 form an LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port. l l 8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter TAG Value Range l Description If TAG is set to Access: l In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2– PORT4. The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded. The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received. The packets that carry VLAN tags are received. The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded. l l If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l l Default VLAN ID Entry Detection 300 Enabled In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1. l In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port PORT1 300 PORT3 In this example, PORT1 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-23 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Value Range 300 Description The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows. Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) PORT2 100 PORT3 100 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service. l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows: Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL. l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created. In this example, this parameter adopts the default value. l Source Port Source VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) Sink Port Sink VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6) 8-24 PORT2 200 PORT3 200 In this example, PORT2 is the service source port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service. In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port. The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. 1. Create the flow. a. b. c. l In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Configuration tab. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the eight flows. Then, click OK. Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A2 as follows: Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300. Port VLAN ID PORT1 300 l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 100. Port VLAN ID PORT2 100 l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter Flow Type Value Range PORT+VLAN Flow Description When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow. In this example, the source VLAN ID is 200. Port VLAN ID PORT2 200 2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Create the CAR. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-25 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) a. b. c. l In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CAR Configuration tab. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the two CARs. Then, click OK. Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 1 Enabled 10240 Description In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR 1 is enabled. l l In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s. When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate(kbit/s) 0 In this example, the CBS is 0. 20480 l l In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s. When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 In this example, the MBS is 0. l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter CAR ID Enabled/ Disabled Value Range 2 Enabled Description In this example, CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation. In this example, CAR 2 is enabled. 8-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter Committed Information Rate(kbit/s) Value Range 20480 Description l l In this example, the CIR is 20480 kbit/s. When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Peak Information Rate(kbit/s) 0 In this example, the CBS is 0. 40960 l l In this example, the PIR is 40960 kbit/s. When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 3. Create the CoS. a. b. c. l 0 In this example, the MBS is 0. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Click the CoS Configuration tab. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. Then, click OK. Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 1 simple Description In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue. CoS Priority 7 l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B2 as follows. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-27 In the NE Explorer. the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. CoS Priority 3 l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A2 as follows. and 200. After setting the parameters. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple. The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 2 simple Description In this example. 100. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). click OK. all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Parameter CoS ID CoS Type Value Range 3 simple Description In this example. Value Range PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 Description In this example. Paramet er Port Flow Type PORT +VLAN Flow PORT +VLAN Flow PORT +VLAN Flow VLAN ID 300 100 200 8-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. b. CoS Priority 2 4. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. a. If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple. Ltd. Click the Flow Configuration tab. The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues.. Bind the CAR/CoS. PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows. CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation. In this case. thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Paramet er Bound CAR Bound CoS Value Range 1 2 Description The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR. LAG Name is set to LAG_1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click New. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. In this example. The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS. 1.6 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally. 3 1 2 Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port. Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. The user creates the LAG manually.. In the NE Explorer. 3. click OK. Parameter LAG No. Then. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Value Range 1 LAG_1 Manual Description In this example. select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. LAG Name LAG Type Load Sharing Non-Sharing Main Port Selected Slave Ports PORT3 PORT4 ----End 8. LAG No. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. 8-29 . The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. is set to 1. 2. In this example. according to the service plan. a hot backup scheme is provided. PORT3 is the main port.2. according to the service plan. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. After setting the parameters. In this example. Ltd. PORT4 is the slave port. the port works in auto-negotiation mode. Procedure Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board. 3. respectively. Ltd. Parameter Port The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set. Value Range PORT1 Description l l 2. click Apply. PORT1 transmits and processes PAUSE frames. In this example. 1. In this example. select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Enabled/ Disabled Working Mode NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Enabled Auto-Negotiation Disabled In the case of the port that accesses services. Set the basic attributes of the ports.8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 2. In the NE Explorer. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The user services use PORT1. select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. That is. set this parameter to Enabled. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set CoS Parameter and CoS Priority. this parameter adopts the default value. l Enable Symmetric Flow Control When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Select External Port. After setting the parameters. Parameter CoS Parameter Value Range Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag Description The data flows correspond to Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag and Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag. click Apply. Click the Flow Configuration tab. In the NE Explorer. You must be logged in to the NE. l In this example. Step 2 Configure the CoS of the IFH2 board. the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled. 1. The IFH2 board must be added. After setting the parameters. 8-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The data flow of Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 1. by using the NMS. 8-31 .2. For details. Ltd.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 8 Configuring Hybrid Microwave-Based Ethernet Services on the Per-NE Basis Parameter CoS Priority Value Range 3 1 Description l The data flow of Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 3. This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled. The procedure for configuring an NE that uses the IDU 605 is not provided in this document.. NE3 is the OptiX RTN 600 NE that uses the IDU 605 1F.7 Configuring NE3 You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning. l ----End 8. see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 605 Configuration Guide. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. . 5 Creating a LAG Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads. you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. 9. Ltd.2 Creating Ethernet Services The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. 9. Hence. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you need to configure the LPT port and the related information.1 Configuring Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. 9. 9-1 . 9. 9.6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the actual service requirements.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) About This Chapter This task collection contains all the common tasks related to configuring Ethernet services.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services In the case of Ethernet over SDH. This increases the availability of the connection. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. thus increasing bandwidth.4 Configuring the QoS The QoS provides differentiated services. 9.. you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality of the Ethernet services.7 LPT Configuration When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. 9. In addition. Precautions l The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. Ltd. 9.1 Configuring Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default. you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth.1. and advanced attributes. the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is. the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700". The operation does not affect services. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.1. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively. Thus. – Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. 9. That is.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is.1.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. network attributes.. – l The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board. 9. the attributes of the internal port need to be set.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9.1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9. PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services. The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes. network attributes.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is.1. PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) 9-2 . the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network. and advanced attributes. VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. 9. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) l 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and it supports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. NOTE If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the basic attributes of the port. 3. Click Apply. Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port. 1. 2. Click the Flow Control tab. Set the flow control mode of the port. 3. Click Apply. Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. 1. 2. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set the TAG attributes of the port. 3. Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port. 1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Click the Network Attributes tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-3 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2. Set the network attributes of the port. 3. 1. 2. Click Apply. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Set the advanced attributes of the port. Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port. 3. Click Apply. ----End Parameters Parameter Enabled/Disabled Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In the case of other ports, set this parameter to Disabled. If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated. l 9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Working Mode Value Range 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (EFT4) 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6) Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex (IFH2) Default Value Auto-Negotiation Description l The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. The GE optical interface on the EMS6 board supports the 1000M full-duplex mode only. l l l l Maximum Frame Length 1518–1535 (EFT4) 1518–9600 (EMS6) 1522 The value of this parameter should be greater than the maximum length of a frame among all the data frames to be transported. In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameter is invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case of the EMS6 board, this parameter has a restriction on Jumbo frames. If Jumbo frames are not considered and the accessed services are ordinary Ethernet frames that use VLAN tags or do not have VLAN tags, it is recommended that you use the default value. If the access services include services that use double tags such as QinQ services, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 1526. MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet frame signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. In normal cases, use the default value. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back. In normal cases, use the default value. 9-5 l PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop Non-Loopback l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter is used when Working Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation. When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames. When this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. When this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. The non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side. This parameter is used when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send and process PAUSE frames. When this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames. When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can perform as follows: – – l l l l Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Disabled, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2) Disabled l l l l Sends and processes PAUSE frames. Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. – l The autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side. 9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Entry Detection Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled Description l This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes. Set this parameter according to actual situations. When ports are configured with TAG flags, the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-1. If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For using this parameter, see Table 9-1. Set this parameter according to actual situations. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For using this parameter, see Table 9-1. When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, set this parameter according to actual situations. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value. When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created. l TAG Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid Tag Aware l l l l Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l l l VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l l l Port Attributes UNI, C-Aware, SAware UNI l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-7 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets. When a broadcast storm may occur in the equipment on the opposite side, set this parameter to Enabled. The port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter should be greater than the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets when the broadcast storm does not occur. Generally, set this parameter to 30% or a greater value. Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold 10% to 100% 30% Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Disabled Table 9-1 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame. Ingress 9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Choose Internal Port. the port directly transmits the frame.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame How to Process Tag aware The port transmits the frame. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. the attributes of the internal port need to be set. VCTRUNKs 1–8 determine the services to be transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services. If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Ltd. the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–8. the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. l 9.1. which are bound with PORTs 1–4 respectively. VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board. Hybrid l Egress If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID. 9-9 . The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. Thus. Precautions The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. l The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–4.. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. That is. Ltd. In Configurable Ports. 1. 2.. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. Then. 5. Click OK. 7. 6. Click the Bound Path tab. Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port. 2. In Available Bound Paths. 3. Click the LCAS tab. Click Configuration. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port. 9-10 Click Apply. 3. click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed. 1.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs. select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box. . 1. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Apply. 2.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 3. 3. It is recommended that you use the default value. 2. Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port. the FCS is the CRC. Click Apply.. 2. 1. Click the TAG Attributes tab. HDLC Unscrambled. ----End Parameters Parameter Mapping Protocol Scramble Value Range GFP. Click the Network Attributes tab. 3. 3. LAPS. l Set Inverse Value for CRC Yes l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the FCS is the result after you perform a negation operation for the CRC. When this parameter is set to No. 9-11 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. Scrambling Mode [X43+1]. This parameter is valid only when Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC. 1. l This parameter specifies the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol. When this parameter is set to Yes. Ltd. Click Apply. Set the TAG attributes of the port. Scrambling Mode [X48+1] Yes. Set the network attributes of the port. No Default Value GFP Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Description It is recommended that you use the default value. This parameter specifies whether the GFP payload header contains the extension header and eHEC. the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last. When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol.. FCS16. or No. this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. When this parameter is set to Big endian. It is recommended that you use the default value. 9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last. a 32-bit FCS is used. Ltd. When the Ethernet board uses the LAPS mapping protocol. l l l l l FCS Calculated Bit Sequence Big endian. It is recommended that you use the default value. Yes No l l Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured. When this parameter is set to Little endian. Little endian l l Big endian (GFP) Little endian (LAPS or HDLC) l l l Extension Header Option No. It is recommended that you use the default value. a 16-bit FCS is used. this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16. this parameter can be set to FCS32. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . No Default Value FCS32 Description l When this parameter is set to FCS32.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Check Field Length Value Range FCS32. When this parameter is set to FCS16. FCS16. When the Ethernet board uses the HDLC mapping protocol. Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Available Bound Paths Value Range - Default Value - Description Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services. As a result. select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved. select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. Hence. Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Ltd. bidirectional paths are bound. The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. This parameter specifies whether the LCAS function is enabled. the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. 9-13 . Generally. Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. Disabled Disabled l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l l l Enabling LCAS Enabled. when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths.. It is recommended that you use the default value. When this parameter is set to Standard Mode. If the equipment on the opposite side is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode. the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the Rs-Ack. Otherwise. the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Standard Mode. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. any integer that ranges from 2000 to 10000 and has a step of 100 2000 l l WTR Time(s) 0 to 720 300 l l TSD Enabled. it is recommended that you set this parameter to 2000 ms. the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. If the paths of the VCTRUNK are configured with protection. When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter. In the case of the VC-12. Ltd.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter LCAS Mode Value Range Huawei Mode. In the case of the VC-3. l l l Hold Off Time (ms) 0. the VCG uses the restored member link.. When a member link is faulty. Otherwise. the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. set this parameter to Huawei Mode. the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3. This parameter specifies whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Standard Mode Default Value Huawei Mode Description l This parameter specifies the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet. It is recommended that you use the default value. set this parameter to 0. When this parameter is set to Huawei Mode. Disabled Disabled l l 9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-2. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. For using this parameter. If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames). When this parameter is set to UNI. l TAG Access. Tag Aware. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created. 9-15 . Set this parameter according to actual situations. it is recommended that you use the default value. the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services. If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames). Generally. Hybrid Tag Aware l l l l Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l l l VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l l l Port Attributes UNI. When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware. For using this parameter.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Entry Detection Value Range Enabled. set this parameter to Tag Aware. Ltd. set this parameter to Access. C-Aware. Disabled Default Value Enabled Description l This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes. In the case of QinQ services. SAware UNI l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes. set this parameter to Hybrid.. see Table 9-2. When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes. set this parameter according to actual situations. When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames. see Table 9-2. When ports are configured with TAG flags. Set this parameter according to actual situations. and receives the frame. The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of a transmission line. l Ingress Egress Tagged frame The port transmits the frame. l 9-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and receives the frame. The port discards the frame.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Activation Status Value Range Activated. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. Hybrid The port receives the frame. NOTE l The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line. Ltd. the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Access The port discards the frame. Inactivated Default Value - Description Displays whether the VCTRUNK is activated. If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID. l l Table 9-2 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame How to Process Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond. If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID. The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond.. to the frame. the port directly transmits the frame. to the frame. 1. you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9. Ltd.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default. The operation does not affect services. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed Jumbo frames.1. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. 9-17 . Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames. the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700". Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree.. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 9.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. ----End Parameters Parameter Jumbo Frame Value Range 00 00 to FF FF Default Value 88 70 Description This parameter specifies the type field of Jumbo frames. Precautions The EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames. That is. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. . ----End Parameters For specific parameters. 9-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Step 3 Click Configuration. see 9. . 1. In Configurable Ports. Step 5 Optional: Dynamically decrease the VCTRUNK bandwidth. Select the VC paths to be deleted in Selected Bound Paths and click Optional: Repeat Step 5. In Available Bound Paths.2 to delete other VC paths.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.. 2. Step 6 Click OK. Ltd. select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. 2. 3. Do not select the Display in Combination check box. 1. Step 4 Optional: Dynamically increase the VCTRUNK bandwidth.3 and bind other VC paths. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board. 3. Select desired items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 4. Select Internal Port. 4. 9-19 . such as the service source and service sink.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EFT4 board is an Ethernet transparent transmission board. 9. you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9. perform certain operations to configure the related information.2. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. perform certain operations to configure the related information.2. 9. and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port. Hence..1 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service.2. perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service When an Ethernet private line service is not used.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service When an Ethernet LAN service is not used. 9. 9.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service. Ltd. 9. 9. The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout. you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service.2 Creating Ethernet Services The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services.2. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to the VCTRUNKs. That is. Precautions l l This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service.2. you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources.2. Step 2 Click New. such as the service source and service sink. 9. the enabled state of the mounted port. IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service. Ltd. Click Configuration. In Configurable Ports. . 9-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. set Level and Direction of the bound paths. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5. 1. NOTE The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes. Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. In Available Bound Paths. 5. select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.4 to bind other VC paths.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Optional: Set the port attributes of the source port and sink port. Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service. 2. 3. Generally. Ltd. That is. l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When setting this parameter to Bidirectional. when the service source is forwarded to the sink port. l When setting this parameter to Unidirectional.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) NOTE The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes. the service source is forwarded only to the sink port. ----End Parameters Parameter Service Type Direction Value Range EPL. set this parameter to EPL. Step 6 Click OK. Click OK. the service sink is forwarded to the source port. create the service only from the service source to the service sink. 9-21 . Bidirectional Default Value EPL Bidirectional Description When creating the non-QinQ private line service. That is. it is recommended that you use the default value.. EVPL (QinQ) Unidirectional. create the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source. 6. The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e. use ".g. When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK. Ltd. "1. use a VCTRUNK as the sink port. 5. and 6.. For example.3-6) 1–4095 - l l l l Sink Port A specific PORT or VCTRUNK PORT1 l l l 9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. use a specific PORT as the source port. 3. When setting this parameter to several numbers. When you set this parameter to null. l Source VLAN (e.g. 1. 3–6" indicates numbers 1.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Source Port Value Range A specific PORT or VCTRUNK Default Value PORT1 Description l This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides. all the services of the source port work as the service source. or several numbers." to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. When you set this parameter to a non-null value. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . You can set this parameter to null. a number.3-6). only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source. 4. This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides. Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port. 1. When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK. or several numbers. 3–6" indicates numbers 1. When you set this parameter to a non-null value. l l Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured. The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e. use ". Hybrid Tag Aware When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT. all the services of the sink port work as the service sink.g. 4. When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames. l l l Port Enabled TAG Enabled.3-6). When setting this parameter to several numbers. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. l When all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames). 9-23 . 5. a number. set this parameter to Hybrid. Disabled Access. set this parameter to Tag Aware. Ltd.. When you set this parameter to null. 1. "1. For example. set Port Enabled to Enabled.3-6) Value Range 1–4095 Default Value - Description l You can set this parameter to null. only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service sink.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Sink VLAN (e. Tag Aware. 3." to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers.g. When all of the accessed services are not frames with the VLAN tag (untagged frames). and 6. set this parameter to Access. Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge. Inactivated - Displays whether the VCTRUNK is activated. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. l l l l Activation Status Activated. select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Available Bound Paths Value Range - Default Value - Description Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services. when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound. Hence. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 9-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. bidirectional paths are bound. select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths. the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. Generally. 9.2. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service. That is. Ltd. Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. l Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 9-25 . Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.1d bridge. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Precautions l This task describes only how to create the 802.1q bridge. Ltd. l Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type.. Step 2 Click New.1d bridge and how to create the 802. l Set the attributes of the 802. 4. Ltd. Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports. .2 to select other mounted ports. Click Configure Mount. In Configurable Ports.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge. Click OK. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed. 1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 1. 3. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. and then click Optional: Repeat Step 4. 9-26 Click Configuration. configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK.. 2. select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port. Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. When setting this parameter to 802.1d bridge.1q bridge. 802. l Bridge Type 802. In Available Bound Paths. you can also use the 802.1d bridge. Step 6 Click OK.1q. 4. This task describes only how to create the 802. create the 802. If the conditions of the VLAN that is used by the user are not known and if the user does not require the isolation of the data among VLANs.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 3. Click OK.1d.4 to bind other VC paths. 6. Using the 802. 5. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click Optional: Repeat Step 5. 9-27 l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge. NOTE The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.1q bridge is a priority.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1d. Ltd..1q.1q bridge. .1q When setting this parameter to 802.1ad (EMS6) 802. create the 802. 802. . ----End Parameters Parameter VB Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths. the preceding described check is not conducted. Generally. Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l Available Bound Paths - The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table. Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge. Hence. select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound. select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound. all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode. the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is enabled. the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority. - - This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.1d) Default Value IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . bidirectional paths are bound.. l Mount Port - - l l Configurable Ports Mount each VCTRUNK of the port.1q). SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Bridge Switch Mode Value Range IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802. If the ingress filter is disabled. Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths. when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths.1q). all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables. Set this parameter according to actual situations. As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths.1d) Description l When the bridge uses the SVL mode. l l l l 9-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802. 2. and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port. Ltd. click Apply.1d/802. After changing the settings in the dialog box that is displayed. Precautions CAUTION Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Activation Status Value Range Activated. 9-29 . and click the Service Mount tab. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. click Configure Mount. the enabled state of the mounted port. Inactivated Default Value - Description Displays whether the VCTRUNK is activated. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. click OK. To change the port that is connected to the 802. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. That is. To change the port that is connected to the 802. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created.1q bridge.1ad bridge. click the corresponding Mount Port. Step 3 Modify the mounted port of this bridge and the related attributes of the mounted port. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. 9. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. After selecting the corresponding option from the drop-down list. the port cannot forward the service. l The Spoke ports cannot access each other. set this parameter to Tag Aware. Tag Aware. Set this parameter according to actual situations. When ports are configured with TAG flags. When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames. If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames). Spoke Enabled Hub Set Port Enabled to Enabled. Disabled Hub. set this parameter to Hybrid. the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-2. set this parameter to Access. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other. l TAG Access. Otherwise. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . a specific VCTRUNK Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge. If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames). l Port Enabled Hub/Spoke Enabled. l Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge.. a specific PORT. Hybrid Tag Aware l l l l 9-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Hub ports can access each other.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter VB Port Mount Port Value Range 1 to 14 Unconnected. Ltd. Set this parameter according to actual situations. Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l l l Activation Status Activated. 10M Full-Duplex. 100M Full-Duplex.. The EVPLAN service must be created. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. That is. 100M Half-Duplex. and click the VLAN Filtering tab.2. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 100M Half-Duplex.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. Ltd. 100M Full-Duplex. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode. set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex. 9. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. 1000M FullDuplex. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation. When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode. set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Working Mode Value Range 10M Half-Duplex. AutoNegotiation (EMS6) Default Value Auto-Negotiation Description l The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes. 9-31 . Inactivated - Displays whether the VCTRUNK is activated. 5. 4. When you set this parameter to several numbers. Set this parameter according to actual situations. 2. Set VLAN ID (e. and 6. 4.g: 1. use ". 3–6" indicates numbers 1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 1. "1. l 9-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Parameters Parameter VLAN ID (e. Click New. The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Ltd." to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example. and then click Optional: Repeat Step 3. 3. 3. .g:1.3-6) Value Range 1–4095 Default Value Description l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. 5. Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports.3-6). Click OK..3 to select other forwarding ports. g:1. The broadcast packet that is transmitted by the ports in selected forwarding ports is broadcast only to the ports included in selected forwarding ports.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service When an Ethernet private line service is not used. 9-33 .2. choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. l l 9. Default Value - Description l The packets can be forwarded between the selected forwarding ports only. The Ethernet private line service must be configured and the service is not be used.3-6) tag.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service When an Ethernet LAN service is not used. Ltd. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources. ----End 9. Step 2 Click Query. Step 4 Click Query. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. At this time..2. you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. The ports that are in selected forwarding ports can forward only the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Then. That is.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter selected forwarding ports Value Range This parameter indicates the ports that are mounted to a bridge. the Ethernet private line service is already deleted. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Then. Then. choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.3.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted. 9-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 6 Select the Ethernet LAN service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board. the corresponding crossconnection resources are released. Ltd. The Ethernet LAN service must be configured and the service is not used.3 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services In the case of Ethernet over SDH. Then. Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entries that need to be deleted. 2. 9. the Ethernet private line service is already deleted.3. Then. thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 Click Query. Step 2 Click Query. Background Information Deleting an Ethernet LAN service involves the following tasks: 1. Then. Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab. you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Deleting the VLAN filtering table Deleting the VB mounting relation Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab. 9. At this time. That is. click Delete. click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. ----End 9. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Then.. 1. Click Close. Then. Ltd. 2.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted. Step 2 Query the data. prompting This services of the NE will be cleared by this operation. Then. Click OK. Click OK.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the Ethernet service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Are you sure to continue?. 9.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to create the crossconnections of the Ethernet services. Then. Another Confirm dialog box is displayed.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services to create the cross-connections of the SNCP Ethernet services. 4. 1. 1. 9-35 2. prompting Operation succeeded. 3. prompting This operation will query service at the NE and update service date at the NM. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click Delete. prompting Are you sure to deactivate all selected services (only for activated services?). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click OK. Click Close. the corresponding crossconnection resources are released. Then. See 5. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Are you sure to continue?.. Click Query. see 5. the Confirm dialog box is displayed. prompting Are you sure to delete all the selected services (only for inactive services)?. Then. Step 4 Deactivate the service. Click Deactivate. That is. 3. select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.3. If SNCP is configured for the Ethernet services. prompting Operation succeeded. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.3. Step 5 Delete the service. and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate. 9.4 Configuring the QoS The QoS provides differentiated services. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations. After the flow classification. Step 6 Click Query. the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 9. the cross-connection of the Ethernet service is already deleted.4. a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed.4.4 Binding the CAR/CoS To enable the CAR or CoS function. The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2. the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue.7 Modifying CAR Parameters The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. That is.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network. Hence. 3. you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate.. thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network. The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet. you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality of the Ethernet services. restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. 9.4.3 Creating the CoS By using the CoS. Click Close. Click OK. At this time.1 Creating a Flow In the case of the Ethernet switching board. ----End 9. bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets. 9. the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). 9. Then.4. and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. 9-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .4.4. prompting Operation succeeded. In this process.4.2 Creating the CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies.8 Modifying CoS Parameters The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Ltd.4. 9. 9. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. 9. That is. 9-37 . The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Click New. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9. Step 4 Set the flow parameters. a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed. The associated Ethernet service must be created.4.1 Creating a Flow In the case of the Ethernet switching board. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.. Ltd. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 5 Click OK. Port +SVLAN Flow. Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. Set this parameter to the source C-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.1ad bridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as the service source. Ltd. l VLAN ID 1–4095 1 l l C-VLAN 1–4095 1 l l 9-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified as a type of flow. Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow Default Value Port Flow Description Port flow: The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter Flow Type Value Range Port Flow. set this parameter to the source port or sink port of the associated Ethernet service. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this port+VLAN as the service source.. This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow. set this parameter to a mounted port of the bridge. This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow. Port +VLAN Flow. The Ethernet service associated with this flow type is the line service or Layer 2 switching service that uses this port as the service source. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802. Port PORT1–PORT6.1ad bridge) that uses this port + C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source. Set this parameter to the source VLAN of the associated Ethernet service. VCTRUNK1– VCTRUNK8 (EMS6) PORT1 l When the associated service is the line service. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . When the associated service is the Layer 2 switching service. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802. 9. l Postrequisite After creating a flow.2 Creating the CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification. Step 4 Set the CAR parameters.. bind it to the corresponding CAR or CoS operation as required. thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network. That is. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab. the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet. 9-39 . Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.4. The New Car dialog box is displayed.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter S-VLAN Value Range 1–4095 Default Value 1 Description l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click New. Ltd. and is used to bind a flow to an associated CAR operation. l Enabled/Disabled Enabled. with a step of 64 0 When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR. these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. This parameter determines whether to enable the CAR operation performed on the flow bound to the CAR. Disabled Disabled Committed Information Rate (kbit/s) An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576. ----End Parameters Parameter CAR ID Value Range 1–65535 (EMS6) Default Value Description This parameter identifies a CAR operation. l 9-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .. The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR. Ltd.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 5 Click OK. The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port. The inherent size of the CBS is determined by the CIR. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR. and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent size. the greater the CBS. The inherent size of the MBS is determined by the PIR.. the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. certain packets can burst and can pass the restriction of the CAR. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the set MBS.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Committed Burst Size (kbyte) Value Range 0–1024 Default Value 0 Description When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is not more than the CIR in a certain period. These packets can be forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. with a step of 64 0 When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR. certain packets can burst and are marked yellow. which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. 9-41 . which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. l Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0–1024 0 When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR. the greater the MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent size. and this parameter indicates the increment value only. Ltd. l Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576. The greater the CIR. The greater the PIR. . bind the flow to the corresponding CAR operation as required.3 Creating the CoS By using the CoS. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Click New. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 4 Set the CoS parameters.4. That is. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 9-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 9. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Postrequisite After creating the CAR. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Ltd. l CoS Type In the case of the EMS6 board: l l l - simple VLAN priority DSCP l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Step 5 Click OK. ----End Parameters Parameter CoS ID Value Range 1–65535 Default Value 1 Description This parameter identifies a CoS operation. the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the user priorities specified in the VLAN tags of these packets. 9-43 . Ltd. all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue. the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets. If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP.. and is used to bind a flow to an associated CoS operation. If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority. l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the CoS priorities of these eight queues are from 0 to 7. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. If the traffic shaping feature of all the queues is enabled or disabled. That is.. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled. according to the set CIR. and the other queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. In the case of the EMS6 board: l Each port on the EMS6 board supports eight egress queues. 9. Ltd. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled. bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).4 Binding the CAR/CoS To enable the CAR or CoS function. the queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. according to the SP +WRR algorithm.4. bind the flow to the corresponding CoS operation as required. l l Postrequisite After creating the CoS. 9-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The flow and CAR/CoS must be created.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter CoS Priority Value Range In the case of the EMS6 board: 0–7 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specified which queue a packet is scheduled to. If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 9-45 . Bound CoS - - 9. Ltd. Step 3 Bind the CAR/CoS. even though the parameters of the CAR operations are the same. Different CAR IDs should be bound to different flows.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. ----End Parameters Parameter Bound CAR Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the CAR ID corresponding to a CAR operation. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management . The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. different CoS IDs should be bound to different flows. and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate. Step 4 Click Apply. This parameter indicates the CoS ID corresponding to a CoS operation. even though the parameters of the CoS operations are the same.. In the case of the EMS6 board.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.4. select a port. Step 3 Set the traffic shaping information about the port queue.. Step 2 In Port List. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled. The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR. according to the set CIR. l CIR (kbit/s) An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574. with a step of 64 0 l l 9-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click Apply. If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled. l This parameter determines whether to enable the traffic shaping of an egress queue. ----End Parameters Parameter Port Enabled/Disabled Value Range A specific PORT or VCTRUNK Enabled. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled. these packets directly enter the egress queue. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port whose traffic is shaped. according to the SP +WRR algorithm.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR. Ltd. which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of queue congestion. Step 2 Set CoS Priority for User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag to User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag.4. The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port. That is.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. l 9. the packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. the packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue. The IFH2 board must be added in the NE Panel. 9-47 . When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR. choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. When the buffer overflows. Then. Procedure Step 1 Select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter PIR (kbit/s) Value Range An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574. the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. with a step of 64 Default Value 0 Description l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR. Ltd. Step 3 Click Apply. The corresponding CoS priority levels that correspond to the four queues are 0– 3 and the scheduling scheme is SP. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. User Priority 5 in the VLAN Tag. User Priority 6 in the VLAN Tag. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority. and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. User Priority 4 in the VLAN Tag.. The higher the CoS priority. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. User Priority 3 in the VLAN Tag. CoS Priority 0 l This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter CoS Parameter Value Range User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag. In this process. Ltd. l 9. 9-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The IFH2 board supports four queues. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag.4. restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized.7 Modifying CAR Parameters The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. That is. you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate. The CAR must be configured. User Priority 2 in the VLAN Tag. The IFH2 boards supports differentiating the data flows according to the user priority levels in the VLAN tags of packets. the higher is the queue priority. User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 0–3 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the data flows. choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. That is. The CoS must be configured.4. 9-49 . Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 9. Step 3 Click Query. Step 5 Select the CoS Parameter that needs to be changed. choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. see 9. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Then.4. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets. Step 6 Click Apply. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Select CAR ID that needs to be changed. Step 4 Select the CoS ID that needs to be changed. Ltd. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab.8 Modifying CoS Parameters The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. ----End Parameters For details.2 Creating the CAR.. Step 5 Modify the other parameters that need to be modified. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. This increases the availability of the connection..3 Creating the CoS. Ethernet boards must be created.5 Creating a LAG Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. thus increasing bandwidth. Ltd. 9. That is. Step 3 Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. 9-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 9. Step 7 Click Apply. The physical network topology must be established. select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Set the parameters.4. Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. In addition. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 6 Modify CoS Priority. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . ----End Parameters For details. Ltd. Set Port Priority and System Priority. the system refers to the board.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Step 4 Click OK. LAG Name Value An integer from 1 to 7(EMS6) For example: LAG_1 Default Description Displays the LAG number. In this example. Displays the LAG name. The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified. 9-51 . NOTE l l The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority.. and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address of the board. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. When the system negotiates with the remote system. The port that has the smallest port ID in a LAG has the priority to be aggregated first. ----End Parameters Field LAG No. 9-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. so that the convergence information can be consistent. set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment. In other situations. a port can be in the Selected or Standby state. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . you can determine whether to perform a convergence. In a LAG. Manual: If this value is selected. this parameter is set to Manual. Static Default Static Description l Static: If this value is selected. The convergence information is exchanged among the different equipment through the LACP protocol. According to the physical (UP or DOWN) state of the port. You can verify the working status (selected or standby) of ports in the LAG. Ltd.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Field LAG Type Value Manual. you can manually create a LAG with no LACP protocol. The port can be in the UP or DOWN state. you can manually create a LAG with the LACP protocol. l In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1+1 protection. a type of hot backup mechanism is provided. to suppress the link failure. In this case. the system chooses one link from the standby links of the LAG and activates it. l In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1+1 protection. Ltd. When the active link of a LAG fails. NonSharing Default Sharing Description l Sharing: If this value is selected. When the LAG members change. The load sharing can increase a higher bandwidth for the link. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or certain links fail. Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG has traffic.. set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment. the system automatically reallocates the traffic. and other links are standby.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Field Load Sharing Value Sharing. 9-53 . In other situations. this parameter is set to Non-Sharing. each member link of a LAG has traffic at the same time and shares loads together. . Ltd. Revertive Revertive 9-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Revertive Mode Non-Revertive. MAC Sharing Mode Default IP Sharing Mode Description This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Sharing.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Field Sharing Mode Value IP Sharing Mode. set this parameter to Non-Revertive. If the Hybrid microwave is configured with the 1 +1 IF protection. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing. l After a LAG is created. l In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1 +1 protection. all services are transmitted on the link to which the main port is connected. set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment. Ltd. you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. In other situations. Services cannot be added to a slave port.. 9-55 . you need to select the port that is interconnected with the active IF board IFH2 for this parameter. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the Load Sharing parameter is set to Non-Sharing.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Field Main Port Value For example: PORT1 Default - Description The main port in a LAG. The links to which other slave ports are connected function as protection links. . Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . In other situations. 9-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Unless they are manually modified. set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment. Available Slave Ports For example: PORT2 - l In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1 +1 protection.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Field Slave Port Value - Default - Description The slave port in a LAG. the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the link aggregation group. The slave ports in a link aggregation group are fixed. you need to select the port that is interconnected with the standby IF board IFH2 for this parameter. Ltd. The parameter specifies that a link aggregation group is manually created rather than being automatically created by the system. A link aggregation group contains main ports and slave ports. l Selected Slave Ports For example: PORT2 - Displays the port that is selected as a slave port. When ports are added into a LAG. the higher the priority.. If the port is the actually working port and services are forwarded at the port. If the port is the standby port and no service is forwarded at the port. This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. Ltd. Out of Service Default - Description The parameter specifies the state. the port status is Out of Service. the port status is In Service. l If you do not query a LAG. of each member ports in a link aggregation group. which is derived from logical computation.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Field Status Value Unknown. the port with highest priority is preferred to transmit services. The smaller the value. l l Port Priority 0-65535. the port status is Unknown. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. in step length of 1 32768 This parameter is valid only when the LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. In Service. 9-57 . Then. When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets. Then. 9. NOTE For different boards. the computation result based on the logic that is selected by the LAG with lower system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs. the higher the priority. The smaller the value. System MAC Address For example: 00-16EC-FA-AC-0A - Displays the system MAC address. in step length of 1 Default 32768 Description This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .6 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the actual service requirements. This parameter indicates the priority of a LAG. the computation result based on the logic that is selected by the LAG with the higher system priority is considered as the result of both LAGs. the system MAC addresses are compared. the value ranges of the port and system priorities are different. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same. 9-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Ltd..9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Field System Priority Value 0-65535. 9.6. In addition.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. The VLAN filter table must be created. you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet. 9-59 . the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. Ltd.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists.6.6. you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. In addition. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Select the bridge that is already created. 9. 9. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.6.6.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 9. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. blacklist entry). blacklist entry). The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry In the case of the Ethernet switching board. static entry) and disabled entry (that is. you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. 1.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol In the case of the Layer 2 service. enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters. 9. That is. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 2 Optional: Create the unicast entry manually. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. static entry) and disabled entry (that is.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled. 9. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is. and click the VLAN Unicast tab. if the loop is formed.6.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item In the case of the Ethernet switching board.6. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. 9.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port. the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default. The set entry applies to all the VLANs.g. 9. 3.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 2. Click OK.1ad bridge. 1. the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default. Set the parameters of the unicast entry. Click OK. The Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed.1ad bridge. Ltd. 3. the set entry applies only to the VLAN whose ID is equal to the set value of this parameter if the IVL mode is used.. 4.1q bridge and the 802. Click New. ----End Parameters Parameter VLAN ID (e. In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the 802. Set this parameter according to actual situations. Select the bridge that is already created.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry In the case of the Ethernet switching board. This parameter indicates the Ethernet port corresponding to a MAC address. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Set this parameter according to actual situations.6. this parameter is invalid if the SVL mode is used. The Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed. l l MAC Address Physical Port Each port that is mounted to a bridge - Set this parameter according to actual situations. Step 3 Optional: Create the disabled entry manually.3-6) Value Range 1–4095 Default Value Description l In the case of the 802. 1. and click the Disable MAC Address tab. Set the parameters of the disabled entry. 4. 2. 9-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click New. 3. Set the duration and unit of the aging time. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. Step 3 Click Apply. 2. That is.. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. 9-61 . 1. Click OK. Ltd. Double-click MAC Address Aging Time corresponding to this Ethernet switching board. Step 2 Modify the aging time of the MAC address table entry. The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. If this parameter is set to a very large value. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol In the case of the Layer 2 service. This mechanism is called aging. Configure parameters of the enabled protocol. That is. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. 1. the bridge may delete the MAC address table entry that is needed. which reduces the forwarding efficiency. 2. which exhausts the resources of the MAC address forwarding table. that is. Step 2 Optional: Set the enabled status of the protocol. and this period is called aging time. this entry is automatically deleted. the bridge stores excessive MAC address table entries that are outdated. It is recommended that you use the default value.. l l l 9. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter MAC Address Aging Time Value Range 1 Min to 120 Day Default Value 5 Min Description l If one entry is not updated in a certain period. if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the relearning of this MAC address. Ltd. 9-62 Click the Protocol Enable tab. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. if the loop is formed. enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters. If this parameter is set to a very small value.6. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is recommended that you do not enable the STP or RSTP in the service networking process. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab. Click the Port Parameter tab. 2. 1. Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter determines whether to enable the spanning tree protocol. you must start the STP or RSTP. If the loop is already formed in the service networking. Step 4 Optional: Set port parameters. 3. set the point-to-point attribute of the Ethernet port. Step 3 Optional: Set bridge parameters. ----End Parameters Parameter Protocol Enabled Value Range Enabled. Click Apply. 1. 2. Click Apply. Ltd. Click Apply. Click Apply. Set bridge parameters. Set port parameters. Set the point-to-point attribute. 1. because this can prevent the Layer 2 service from forming the loop.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) 3.. 9-63 . Click the Bridge Parameter tab. Step 5 Optional: If you are enabling the RSTP. 2. 3. 3. Hence. The greater the value. RSTP Default Value RSTP Description l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled. The smaller the value of this parameter. the higher the priority and the higher the possibility that the bridge is selected as the root bridge.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Protocol Type Value Range STP. the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower. This parameter indicates the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value. 9-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the longer the delay time of the network state change. it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced. the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU. The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge. however. When the value of this parameter is greater. Generally. This parameter indicates the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. The greater the value of this parameter. The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. Ltd. The topology stability. This parameter indicates the interval of transmitting the CBPDU packet of the bridge. l Priority (Bridge Parameter) 0–61440 32768 l l l Max Age (s) 6–40 20 l l Hello Time (s) 1–10 2 l l Forward Delay (s) 4–30 15 l l TxHoldCout (per second) 1–10 6 This parameter indicates the number of times the port transmits the CBPDU in every second.. the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge. decreases. which indicates that the network diameter is greater. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . it is recommended that you use the default value. the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The greater the value. the BPDU cannot be processed and transmitted. Specifies whether the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled for the port. The smaller the value of this parameter. l Port Path Cost 1–65535 - l l Admin Edge Attribute Enabled. This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used. it is recommended that you use the default value. In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path. the higher the priority. When this parameter is set to Enabled. This parameter determines whether to set the port to an edge port. such as a computer. set this parameter to the same value. it is recommended that you use the default value. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. 9-65 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameter Priority (Port Parameters) Value Range 0–240 Default Value 128 Description l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. the RSTP considers this port as a non-edge port. Disabled Disabled l l l Protocol Enabled Enabled. The edge port receives the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU. When this parameter is set to Disabled. If Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled.. Disabled Disabled l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In other cases. This parameter is valid only when Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled. Ltd. This parameter is set to Enabled only when the Ethernet port of the Ethernet board is directly connected to the data communication terminal equipment. It is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value. if the bridge detects that this port is connected to the port of other bridges. Disabled Enabled l l l Auto Edge Detection Enabled. This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. set this parameter to Enabled. In other cases. l l l l l NOTE l l In the service networking process. Ltd. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. Because the RSTP and STP are complicated. If this parameter is set to Adaptive connection. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. 9-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Point-to-Point Attribute Value Range Adaptive connection. If the actual working mode of the port is full-duplex. it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case of the Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP. That is. The VLAN filter table must be created.. It is recommended that you use the default value. you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet. the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". Only the port whose point-to-point attribute is "true" can transmit the rapid transition request and response. If this parameter is set to Link connection. the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "true". If this parameter is set to Shared media.6. before enabling the STP or RSTP.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists. Link connection. the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is "true". the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false". 9. it is recommended that you negotiate with the engineer in charge of maintaining the opposite Ethernet equipment and set the related parameters as instructed. Shared media Default Value Adaptive connection Description l This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used. If the actual working mode of the port is halfduplex. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Step 4 Click Apply.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. the unknown multicast packet is broadcast in the VLAN. If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. When this parameter is set to Disabled. you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol according to the requirement. If the 802. this multicast packet is an unknown multicast packet). Disabled Enabled l l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. When this parameter is set to Enabled.1q bridge or the 802. ----End Parameters Parameter Protocol Enable Value Range Enabled. this parameter indicates the method for processing this packet. l The Discarded Tag of the Packet Excluded in the Multicast Group Enabled. The unknown multicast packet is discarded. Ltd. 9-67 . Set this parameter according to the requirement of the IGMP multicast server. Step 3 Set the information related to the IGMP Snooping protocol. Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter determines whether to enable the IGMP Snooping protocol. Step 2 Click the Protocol Enable tab..1ad bridge receives a multicast packet whose multicast address has no mapping item in the multicast table (that is. Step 3 Modify the aging time of the multicast table item. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. ----End 9-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . The Ethernet LAN service must be created. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Step 2 Click the Multicast Aging Time tab. Step 4 Click Apply. Ltd. the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default.6. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. That is. The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled..5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item In the case of the Ethernet switching board. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9. If this parameter is set to a very large value. Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port. this table item is automatically deleted. That is.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. This mechanism is called aging. which reduces the forwarding efficiency. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which exhausts the resources of the multicast table.. and this period is called aging time. Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer.6.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Parameters Parameter Multicast Aging Time (Min) Value Range 1–120 Default Value 8 Description l When a table item is not updated in a certain period (that is. Step 3 Set Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. 9-69 . Ltd. no IGMP request from this multicast address is received). l l 9. select External Port. If this parameter is set to a very small value. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. the bridge may delete the multicast table item that is needed. the bridge stores excessive multicast table items that are outdated. Then. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout. The data service is configured as the pure transparent service. CAUTION Before configuring the point-to-multipoint LPT function. you can select only one configuration mode to realize the LPT function. 9-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 LPT Configuration When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is. Otherwise. the services may be interrupted. The data service topology is consistent with that of the LPT. On one board. you need to configure the LPT port and the related information.. The Ethernet data board supports the LPT function. l l The data services are displayed in the tree topology. ----End Parameters Parameter Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Value Range Disabled Enabled 10% to 100% 30% Default Value Disabled Description This parameter specifies whether to enable the broadcast packet suppression function. Precautions NOTE l l Point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT are mutually exclusive. 9.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 4 Click Apply. When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The port-based Ethernet private line service must be created and activated. Ltd. the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port. make sure that the following two conditions are met. The data service of the point-to-point LPT is configured as the pure transparent service. Select a PORT and a VCTRUNK port. and set HoldOff Time(ms). Ltd. you need to set Bearer Mode. Click Close.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 2. 1. Repeat Steps 1 through 2 to configure point-to-point LPT for the opposite NE. click New.. Step 2 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Point LPT. 4. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can set Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) and VCTRUNK Port HoldOff Time(ms) as required. select Port from the Convergence Point pane. see Table 9-3. 3. 9-71 . For parameters of the point-to-point LPT. Step 3 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT. Click Apply and a prompt appears telling you the operation was successful. In the LPT Management window. 3. and then set the following parameters. 1. 2. In the Create LPT window. 5. Click Close. Click Query. NOTE If the port at the convergence point is a VCTRUNK port. Click Advanced Configuration. NOTE If LPT is enabled. select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree. see Table 9-4. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.For parameters of the point-to-multipoint LPT. VCTRUNK Port - The VCTRUNK port where EPL services are transparently transmitted. Repeat Steps 1 and Steps 3 to configure point-to-multipoint LPT for other NEs. In the Access Point pane. Reverse Default Description The external port of board. Direction - LPT Bearer Mode Yes.. 9-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The direction of the EPL services that are transparently transmitted. 6. select an appropriate Port and click . 5. ----End Parameter Table 9-3 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT Field Port Value For example: PORT1 For example: VCTRU NK1 Positive. The direction is Positive if the source port is a PORT port and the sink port is a VCTRUNK port. Click OK. Ltd. The direction is Reverse if the source port is a VCTRUNK port and the sink port is a PORT port. The bearer mode of LPT frames. No GFP (HUAW EI). Ethernet 0 to 10000 No GFP(HUAWEI) Sets whether to use LPT. Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time (ms) 100 This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. When the LPT switching is enabled. This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time. you can modify it in the Modify LPT window.9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 4. NOTE l l If the port at the convergence point is not a VCTRUNK port. Double-click Bearer Mode and select an appropriate bearer mode from the drop-down list. If you want to modify Bearer Mode. do not set Bearer Mode. Hold-Off Time (ms) 0 to 10000 0 If LPT switching is enabled. Table 9-4 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT Field Convergence Point Port Value PORT1 to PORT6. This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 9 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) Field VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time (ms) Value 0 to 10000 Default 100 Description This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 GFP (HUAWEI). the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time. Bearer Mode GFP (HUAWEI) Access Point Port PORT1 to PORT6. the port notifies the opposite end after the holdoff time. Ethernet - Bearer Mode GFP (HUAWEI) Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. The port where the access point resides.. The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. Ltd. When the LPT switching is enabled. Ethernet Default PORT1 Description The port where the convergence point resides. VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 GFP (HUAWEI). 9-73 . This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board. . 10. and external alarms.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. 10.1 Configuring the Orderwire This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. asynchronous data services.. you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX RTN 600. 10. 10. 10. E0 level. it can provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame or STM-N frame. When the orderwire is enabled.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces 10 About This Chapter Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. the alarm information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. 10-1 . you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW board of the OptiX RTN 600. you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN 600.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services To configure the synchronous data services. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services. 10.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services To configure the asynchronous data services. Ltd. After the inputting of external alarms is configured. the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end. synchronous data services.4 Configuring External Alarms To configure external alarms. that is. After the outputting of external alarms is configured. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuration Example (External Alarms) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements. Ltd.. When an OptiX RTN 600 dials the orderwire group call number 888. connect the external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwire communication channel. 10-3 . the other OptiX RTN 600s stop ringing. a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information. the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN 600s in the orderwire subnet ring. Context The communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire. it can provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. l l The OptiX RTN 600 supports the group call function of the orderwire. That is. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs. l When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs. When the orderwire is enabled. When an OptiX RTN 600 answers the phone call. the group call becomes a point-to-point call between two NEs. the overhead byte E1 or E2 in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. that is. Step 2 Click the General tab.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces 10. When a radio link exists between two NEs..1 Configuring the Orderwire This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. . 2. 1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Click the Advanced tab. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes. Click Apply. Ltd. Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes. 3.10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Step 4 Click Apply. ----End 10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Parameters Parameter Call Waiting Time (s) Value Range 1–9 Default Value 9 Description l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 5s. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 9s. Set the same call waiting time for all the NEs. This parameter indicates the orderwire phone number of the local station. The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that the phone number consists of three numerics. The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs. The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888. l l Phone 1 100–99999999 101 l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-5 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Orderwire port Value Range Line ports, external clock port, F1 port Default Value - Description l This parameter indicates the ports that can transmit the orderwire information. The OptiX RTN 600 does not support conference calls and thus allows the lines that transmit the orderwire information to form a loop. If the radio link between two nodes is configured with 1+1 protection, only the line port of the main IF board need to be used as the orderwire port. If multiple links (for example, configured with XPIC or N+1 protection) exist between two nodes, the line ports corresponding to all the links need to be used as the orderwire ports. When orderwire communication is implemented by interconnecting the two NEs through the external clock ports, the external clock ports need to be used as the orderwire ports. When orderwire communication is implemented by interconnecting the two NEs through the synchronous data ports, the F1 port need to be used as the orderwire port. This parameter indicates the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire information. Regardless the parameter value, the radio link uses a fixed self-defined overhead byte to transmit the orderwire information. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH. l l l l l Orderwire Occupied Bytes E1, E2 E1 l l 10.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services To configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame or STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces The boards that are related to the synchronous data services must be configured. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the F1 Data Port tab. Step 3 Press the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Click . Step 4 Click Apply. ----End Parameters Parameter Data Channel 1, Data Channel 2 Value Range Depending on the board configuration , the following ports can be selected: SDH optical/ electrical port, IF port, F1 port, and external clock port of the PXC board. Default Value Description l When the SDH optical/electrical line port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used. When the IF port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used. When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port conforms to the G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/s. When the PXC-1 is selected, the external clock port of the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of the overhead bytes. l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-7 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The boards that are related to the asynchronous data services must be configured. Context The asynchronous data port of the OptiX RTN 600 is an RS-232 port and can implement the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The service transmission is required to be point-to-point transparent transmission. Therefore, the port rate and transmission control protocol need not be configured and the maximum communication rate is 19.2 kbit/s. Hence, the asynchronous data port is also considered as the transparent data port. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the broadcast data port. 10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Step 4 Click Apply. ----End Parameters Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1– SERIAL4 Default Value SERIAL1 Description l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. In the case of a radio link, a self-defined Serial overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. When this parameter is set so that it is the same as the SERIAL byte corresponding to the Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used. When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the Overhead Byte of this port is used. When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined Serial byte in the radio frame of this port is used. When this parameter is set to the external clock port on the PXC board, the external clock port on the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of overhead bytes. l Broadcast Data Source Depending on the board configuration , the following values can be selected: SERIAL1– SERIAL4, SDH optical/ electrical port, IF port, and external clock port of No Data l l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-9 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Broadcast Data Sink Value Range the PXC board. Default Value Description 10.4 Configuring External Alarms To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW board of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Context The external alarms of the OptiX RTN 600 are also considered as housekeeping alarms. The external alarm port of the OptiX RTN 600 is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" state or in the "off" state. OptiX RTN 600 IDU 610/620 provides two alarm output ports and six alarm input ports. The alarm input ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the port number of the input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarm port works normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected. Procedure Step 1 Select the EOW board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the input alarm. 1. 2. 10-10 Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Set the parameters of the input alarm. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 2. Unused Default Value Unused Description This parameter is valid for the input relay and is used to set the usage status of this alarm port. 10-11 . Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. 1. Ltd. ----End Parameters Parameter Using Status Value Range Used. Set the parameters of the output alarm. 3. Click Apply. Step 3 Configure the output alarm. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces 3. Click Apply. Unused Unused This parameter is valid for the output relay and is used to set the usage status of this alarm port. the alarm is generated when the relay is on.. This parameter is valid for the output relay. the alarm is generated when the relay is off. An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused Input Relay: An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused l Output Relay: Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off l If this parameter is set to An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused. Manual Automatic Automatic: Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode Manual: Determining the status of the output relay manually l 10-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If this parameter is set to An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused. Ltd. l Working Mode Automatic. If this parameter is set to Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns On. the alarm is generated when the relay is on. If this parameter is set to Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off. l Output Relay: Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Alarm Mode Value Range l Default Value l Description Input Relay: l Input Relay: An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused. the alarm is generated when the relay is off. Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns On Output Relay: l l Use or Not Used. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 10.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. Major Alarm Auto Trigger. and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Parameter Alarm Trigger Conditions Value Range l Default Value l Description This parameter is valid for the output relay. Automatically triggered by Critical & Major alarms. Ltd. by using the NMS. NE1. In the following example.5. As shown in Figure 10-1. In the following example. 10.5. The new service requirements are as follows: the data communication equipment Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. and Critical Alarm Auto Trigger Available values when Working Mode is set to Manual: Output Low Level in Manual and Output High Level in Manual Automatic: Automatically triggered by Critical & Major alarms Manual: Output High Level in Manual l Automatic: Automatically changing the status of the relay according to the preset value Manual: Outputting the high level or low level according to the setting l l 10.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. 10-13 .5. In the following example. 10. NE2.3 Configuration Process You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs.5. l Available values when Working Mode is set to Automatic: Input Path 1–Input Path 6. 10. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.. Ltd. Figure 10-1 Networking diagram NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 64kbit/s 64kbit/s 10.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram. the SL61SCC VER. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . and the required bandwidth must be 64 kbit/s.5. In the case of the OptiX RTN 600. Board Configuration Information The SCC boards of NE1 and NE3 need to provide the F1 synchronous data ports. In the following example. the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.B does not provide the F1 synchronous data port. the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs.C provides the F1 synchronous data port whereas the SL61SCC VER..10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) between NE1 and NE3 must communicate with each other. Configuring the Synchronous Data Port Table 10-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 NE1 6-SL1 F1 NE2 5-IF1A 6-SL1 NE3 5-IF1A F1 Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 10-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services Station Timeslot NE1 6-SL1-1 F1 2-SCC: F1 Add/Frop Forward NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 F1 2-SCC: F1 NE3 5-IF1A-1 10-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 Value Range 6-SL1-1 F1 Description When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected. click Apply. Prerequisite l l All the required boards must be added.3 Configuration Process You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning. click Apply. Click the F1 Data Port tab. The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2. the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used. The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services. 1. Then. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G. In the NE Explorer. select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services. In the NE Explorer. select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel.. 3. by using the NMS. Procedure Step 1 Configure the synchronous data services. 10-15 .703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. 2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Ltd. When the F1 port is selected. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Then. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is.5. 3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces l The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services. l l l 10. Step 2 Configure the synchronous data services. Click the F1 Data Port tab. the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. 10. Step 3 Configure the synchronous data services. by using the NMS. Data Channel 2 F1 ----End 10. In the following example. the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used. 1. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3.6.6. 2.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s. select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G. the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 10. In the following example. 10.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements.2 Service Planning The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram. click Apply. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd. When the F1 port is selected. In the NE Explorer.10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2 Value Range 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 Description When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected. When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected. the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used.6. Parameter Data Channel 1 Value Range 5-IF1A-1 Description When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected. the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. Click the F1 Data Port tab. the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used. 10.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. Then..6. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel.3 Configuration Process You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning. The service requirements are as follows: l l l NE1 must be connected to the monitor server. and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. When no data is transmitted. 10-17 . – Figure 10-3 Networking diagram NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 RS-232 RS-232 10.6. The requirements for the environment monitor are as follows: – l The level of the port must be RS-232. Ltd. the port must be of high RS-232 level (about –9 V). Configuration of the Asynchronous Data Services Table 10-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services Parameter Overhead Byte Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink NE1 SERIAL1 6-SL1-1 S1 NE2 SERIAL1 5-IF1A-1 6-SL1-1 NE3 SERIAL1 5-IF1A-1 S1 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Logic "1" stands for –5 V to –15 V.. NE1. NE3 must be connected to the environment monitor. Point-to-point communication must exist between the monitor server and the environment monitor. NE2. through services at the asynchronous data ports.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces As shown in Figure 10-3. and logic "0" stands for +5 V to +15 V.2 Service Planning The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram. Asynchronous data services need to be activated between NE1 and NE3. Procedure Step 1 Configure the asynchronous data services. 2.10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 10-4 Timeslot allocation diagram Station Timeslot NE1 6-SL1-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1 Add/Frop Forward NE2 6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1 NE3 5-IF1A-1 As shown in the timeslot allocation diagram. In the NE Explorer.3 Configuration Process You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) l 10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot 6 and port 1 of the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2. click Apply. l l l 10.6. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1. the asynchronous data services are as follows: l The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services. After setting the parameters. a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. The SERIAL1 overhead byte on the SDH optical line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. In the case of a radio link. 1. Prerequisite l l All the required boards must be added. That is. . by using the NMS.. Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 Description l In this example. Ltd. select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services. In this example. Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1. When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte. In the case of a radio link. Overhead Byte of this port is used. In the NE Explorer. In this example. select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. click Apply. a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. After setting the parameters. 2. In this example. 10-19 . When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/ electrical line port. After setting the parameters. When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/ electrical line port. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. l Broadcast Data Source 6-SL1-1 l l Selected Broadcast Data Sink 5-IF1A-1 l l Step 3 Configure the asynchronous data services. In the NE Explorer. l Selected Broadcast Data Sink S1 l l Step 2 Configure the asynchronous data services. When this parameter is set to IF port. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 Description l In this example. the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used.. Ltd. 1.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Parameter Broadcast Data Source Value Range 6-SL1-1 Description l In this example. click Apply. Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1. 1. select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. 2. Overhead Byte of this port is used. the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1. Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1. Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to 5-IF1A-1. Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1.2 Service Planning The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram. The alarm modes are the same. that is.3 Configuration Process You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning.7. 10. In this example. a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.7. an alarm is generated when the port enters the "on" state.7 Configuration Example (External Alarms) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.. Inputs three external alarms. and reports a critical alarm and a major alarm. In this example.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning.7. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. In the case of a radio link. by using the NMS. Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1. When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte. Broadcast Data Source is set to 5-IF1A-1. Ltd.10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Overhead Byte Value Range SERIAL1 Description l In this example. When this parameter is set to IF port. the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used. 10. the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) l 10-20 .7. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. 10. the port enters the "off" state when an alarm is generated. The alarm modes are the same. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Broadcast Data Source 5-IF1A-1 l l Selected Broadcast Data Sink S1 l l ----End 10. 10. that is. An OptiX RTN 600 NE must meet the following external alarm requirements: l Outputs two external alarms. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.. Alarm output port 1 Alarm Mode An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused Alarm Trigger Condition Critical Alarm Auto Trigger Alarm output port 2 Major Alarm Auto Trigger Alarm input port 1 - Alarm input port 2 - Alarm input port 3 - 10. Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Figure 10-5 Networking diagram Alarm In1 Alarm In2 Alarm In3 Alarm Out1 Alarm Out2 10.2 Service Planning The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram. Ltd. 10-21 .7. Table 10-3 Configuration of the external alarms Port No. by using the NMS. That is.3 Configuration Process You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list.. Value Range EOW-1 Used EOW-2 EOW-3 In this example. select the EOW board and then choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree. Click Apply. 2. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Use or Not of the alarm interface is set to Used. Using Status of the alarm interface is set to Used. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Ltd. Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode. Description An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused Configure the output alarm. Parameter Value Range EOW-1 Use or Not Working Mode Alarm Trigger Conditions Alarm Mode Used Automatic EOW-2 In this example. Configure the input alarm. In the NE Explorer.10 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Configure external alarms. Paramet er Using Status Alarm Mode 3. 1. Major Alarm Auto Trigger The status of the output relay is changed automatically according to the preset value. Click Apply. The alarm is generated when the relay is on. The alarm is generated when the relay is off. Description Critical Alarm Auto Trigger An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused ----End 10-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11. power attributes. however. including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards. you can also set the service type and signal equalization. you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards. the default values of the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports About This Chapter This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. the parameters of the ports need to be modified. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports. In the case of the E1 interface board. 11-1 . Normally. 11. including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports. Ltd. 11.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces By performing the operations. and advanced attributes of the ODU. 11.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces. you can also set the tributary retiming function. In certain cases. including the RF attributes.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports. Step 5 Select VC4 Channel from the dropdown list.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Ltd. Step 4 Click Apply. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. That is. Procedure Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Step 3 Select Port from the dropdown list and set the parameters of the SDH interface board. A dialog box is displayed and click OK.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11. ----End 11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 6 Configure VC-4 path loopback. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default option of the system). A dialog box is displayed and click OK. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Step 7 Click Apply. The required SDH interface boards must be added. including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports. Ltd. Inloop. Optical (electrical) inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be transmitted to the opposite end. 11. 11-3 . Normally. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board. That is. you can also set the tributary retiming function. Inloop. you can also set the service type and signal equalization. l Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback Non-Loopback. Normally. The required PDH interface boards must be added. Optical (electrical) outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be received. VC-4 path inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be transmitted to the opposite end.. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Close Default Value Open Description l This parameter indicates whether the laser is enabled to receive/transmit optical signals. this parameter takes the default value. Normally.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces By performing the operations. you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board. this parameter takes the default value. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this parameter takes the default value.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports Parameters Parameter Laser Switcha Value Open. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Outloop Non-Loopback l l l NOTE a: Only SDH optical interface boards support this parameter. VC-4 path outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be received. Outloop Non-Loopback l l l VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback. Inloop. l Set the parameters of the PDH interface on the E3/T3 interface board. Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description l Tributary inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be transmitted to the remote end. Ltd.. l l 11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default value). ----End Parameters Parameter Tributary Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback. Generally. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. l Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces on the E1 interface board.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Procedure Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Select Port from the drop-down list. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . this parameter takes the default value. Tributary outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be received. Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces according to the types of the PDH interfaces. Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock. Retiming Mode of CrossConnect Clock Normal l l l l l l Port Service Typeb E3. 11-5 . Ltd. thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. It is recommended that the external clock. When this parameter is set to Normal. By using the retiming function. the board does not detect whether alarms exist in this path. Generally. When this parameter is set to NonLoaded. Non-Loaded Default Value Load Description l This parameter is valid for the tributary ports that are configured with services. it is recommended that you adopt Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock. the board detects whether alarms exist in this path. When this parameter is set to Load. the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock.. the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports Parameter Service Load Indication Value Range Load. this parameter takes the default value. When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock. l l l Retiming Modea Normal. In this way. Set this parameter according to the type of the accessed services. is used to provide an external clock for the client equipment. T3 E3 l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. If the retiming function is required. the retiming function is not used. the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal. instead of the retiming function. This parameter indicates the type of the services the tributary board processes. 3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports. 11. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Otherwise. That is. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. adopt the default value.. Equalized Default Value Unequalized Description l This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3. adopt the default value. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m. b: Only E3/T3 interface boards support the parameters. If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m. This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized. 11-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required IF boards must be added. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. Ltd. l l Output Signal Equalizationb Unequalized. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter Input Signal Equalizationb Value Range Unequalized. including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards. This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3. Otherwise. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . select the IF board from the Object Tree. Equalized Unequalized l l l NOTE l l a: Only E1 interface boards support this parameter. Step 3 Set each parameter for the IF attributes. . Ltd. Step 5 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) NOTE 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode. 11-7 . Step 7 Click Apply. Step 6 Set each parameter for the ATPC attributes. 28MHz.3.QP SK l Default Value 1.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter Radio Work Mode Value Range 1.3.8E1. 128QAM (IFX) Description l This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode. l l 11-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.44E1. 16QAM 3.QP SK 6. 128QAM 8.QPSK 2.53E1.5MHz.16E1.7MHz.14MHz. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.4E1.10E1.E3.2E1.QP SK (IF0A/B) 7. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7 only.E3.4E1. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 16QAM 14.QPS K 17. Ltd.32E1.22E1.STM-1.16E1. channel spacing.28MHz. 64QAM 12.14MHz.5MHz.14MHz. 128QAM 13.QPSK 9. The IF0A/B board supports radio work modes 5.28MHz.14MHz.16E1. 32QAM 15.7MHz.14MHz.14MHz.28MHz.14MHz. 16QAM 5. and 18. 64QAM 16.26E1.28MHz. Set this parameter according to the network planning. 16.28MHz. 32QAM 11.28MHz.QPS K 4.7MHz. 16QAM 7. service capacity. The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode. modulation mode" format.STM-1.7MHz.35E1.Q PSK 18. 17.28MHz..5E1.8E1. The IF1A/B board supports radio work modes 1 to 15. 16QAM 10.4E1.QPSK (IF1A/B) 5. . 128QAM. 8.STM-1. Disabled Disabled l l l l 2M Wayside Input Boardb 1.STM-1.28MHz.16QAM. The wayside E1 service is a 2. Set this parameter according to the planning.E3. Generally. This parameter indicates whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same. or 9. The IDU 610/620 accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock interface on the PXC board. 3 1 l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7. 128QAM. this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7.28MHz. In the case of the IF1A/B board. Ltd.E3. This parameter indicates the slot in which the PXC board accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock port. IF port inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be transmitted to the remote end.QPSK. this parameter takes the default value. In the case of the IFX board. If this parameter is different from Received Link ID. This parameter is valid only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled.048 kbit/s service that is transmitted by the microwave frame overhead. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID.14MHz. 11-9 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports Parameter Radio Link ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 Description l As the identifier of a radio link. Outloop Non-Loopback l l l 2M Wayside Enable Statusb Enabled. IF port outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be received.28MHz. l l IF Port Loopbacka Non-Loopback. the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream. Inloop. this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites. you can set this parameter to another value. Disabled Default Value Enabled Description l This parameter indicates whether the XPIC function is enabled. In this case. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. Disabled Disabled l l l ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)d ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)d -20 dBm to -75 dBm -35 dBm to -90 dBm -45 dBm -70dBm l l ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Enabled. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB. use the XPIC cable to perform self-loop at the XPIC port. Ltd. This parameter sets whether to enable the ATPC. l ATPC Enable Statusd Enabled. This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled.. After the commissioning is complete. When the function is disabled. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . set this parameter to Disabled. Disabled Enabled l l l 11-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set this parameter to Disabled. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATP upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board. If the IF board does not use the XPIC function. within the ATPC controlled range. Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter XPIC Enablec Value Range Enabled. When the function is enabled. Context Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 7 Click Apply. That is. The corresponding ODU must be added in the slot layout diagram.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing. d: The ATPC attributes need to be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link. including the RF attributes. Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab. 11-11 . IF0A/B. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. b: The IFH2 and IF0A/B boards do not support wayside E1 services. Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. and advanced attributes of the ODU. Step 4 Click Apply. The required IF boards must be added. Ltd. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU. Step 10 Click Apply. and IF1A/B boards do not support the XPIC function. c: The IFH2. power attributes. Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. 11..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) NOTE 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports l l l l a: The IFH2 and IFX boards do not support the loopback on the IF ports. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Set this parameter according to the planning. Set this parameter according to the planning. The maximum transmit power adjusted by ATPC should not exceed this value. l l l Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) - - l l l Transmit Power (dBm) - - l l l 11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU. Ltd. The Transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.50% channel spacing. The difference between the Transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Set this parameter according to the planning.. Set this parameter to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset value.11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter Transmit Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l The parameter specifies the channel center frequency. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the rated power range supported by the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU . . If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing. Ltd. the TX power is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. l l l T/R Spacing (MHz) 0–4294967. set this parameter to 0. unmute unmute l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX power and receive power of the ODU. if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power±3 dB. after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes. 11-13 . When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled. the TX power is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low. the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals. indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. When this parameter is set to unmute. the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly. When this parameter is set to mute. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. After the antenna alignment. Set this parameter according to the planning. Generally. this parameter takes the default value. After this parameter is set. the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. indicating that the antenna is not aligned. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high.295 - l l l Configure Transmission Status mute. the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 11 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports Parameter Receive Power (dBm) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. . .1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave. when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads. however. 12-1 . 12. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes 12 About This Chapter Configuring Overhead Bytes This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally. the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified. the default values of the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE. when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm. 12. 12.2 Configuring RSOHs This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE. 12. 12. In certain cases. Ltd. this parameter is set to Enabled. 12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.2 Configuring RSOHs This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > 1588 Overhead from the Function Tree.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12.. That is. Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l When the Hybrid microwave is interconnected with the Packet microwave.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 2 Set the enable status of 1588 Overhead. Step 3 Click Apply. That is. When the Hybrid microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. ----End Parameter Description Parameter 1588 Overhead Value Range Enabled. l 12. select the IFH2 board. this parameter is set to Disabled. The required SDH interface boards must be added. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 3.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes Procedure Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Then. If the remote NE reports the J0_MM alarm. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Step 2 Set the J0 byte. Click OK. Then. l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Click Apply.. ----End Parameters Parameter J0 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). Set the overhead byte. Double-click the parameter to be modified. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Ltd. Step 4 Click OK. 12-3 . 2. a prompt box is displayed. 1. set this parameter according tot he J0 byte to be received at the remote NE. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. the board does not detect the received J0 byte. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 1. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. The required line boards must be added. 2. 12-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is.. l l 12. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab. 3. Set the overhead byte. Double-click the parameter to be modified. When this parameter is set to Disable Mode.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter J0 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) Value Range - Default Value Disable Description l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE. Then. Procedure Step 1 Select the line board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. and disable mode. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Click Apply. 6. 4. Click Apply. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Click the Overhead Termination tab.. 12-5 . Step 4 Optional: Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs. ----End Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 1. Then. 4. 3. Click OK. 1. Click OK. a prompt box is displayed. Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs. Then. Ltd. 3. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes 4. Click Apply. 2. 5. a prompt box is displayed. Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte. Set the C2 byte. a prompt box is displayed. Then. Click OK. 2. Click OK. and disable mode. (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame. (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping. 0x0A). (0xCF) Reserved. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. (0x05) Experimental Mapping. Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization. If the remote NE reports the HP_TIM alarm. (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameters Parameter J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode. (0x03) Locked TU-n. (0x13)ATM Mapping. 12-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (0xFE)O.. set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE. (0xFC) Reserved. (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping. When this parameter is set to Disable Mode. and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D. (0x02) TUG Structure If the remote NE reports the HP_SLM alarm. (0xE1) Reserved. Ltd. (0x15) FDDI Mapping. (0x1B)GFP Mapping. 0x0A). l J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) - Disable l l l C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped. 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D. (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . (0x01)Reserved. the board does not detect the received J1 byte. (0x04)34M/45M into C-3. 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose. set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE. (0x02) TUG Structure. the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then generates new VC-4 overheads according to the board settings. the VC-4 overhead termination of VC-4 pass-through services is Pass-Through and the overhead termination of the VC-3/VC-12 services is Termination. Termination Auto l When this parameter is set to PassThrough. VC4 Overhead Termination Auto. Ltd. When this parameter is set to Termination. l l l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then forwards the original overheads. 12-7 . When this parameter is set to Auto..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes Parameter C2 to Be Received Value Range 181 Test Signal. set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE. PassThrough. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. (0xFF)VC-AIS Default Value Description If the local NE reports the HP_SLM alarm. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Double-click the parameter to be modified. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab. Click OK.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12. Set the C2 byte. 12-8 Click the Signal Flag C2 tab. 2. Click Apply. when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Then. a prompt box is displayed. That is. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree..4 Configuring VC-3 POHs You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads. 4. The corresponding E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board must be added. 1. Ltd. 3. 5. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 6. Set the overhead byte. Procedure Step 1 Select the E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 2. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte. Click OK. Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte. 1. the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. Then. When this parameter is set to Disable Mode. (0x15) FDDI Mapping.. 4. (0x05) Experimental Mapping. Click Apply. (0x04)34M/45M into C-3 (E3/T3 interface boards) (0x02) TUG Structure (Ethernet boards) If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm. a prompt box is displayed. Ltd. and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D. 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). Click OK. 3. (0x02) TUG Structure. 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D. (0x01)Reserved. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (0x03) Locked TU-n. Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). 0x0A).OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes Then. and disable mode. (0x04)34M/45M into C-3. (0x13)ATM Mapping. the board does not detect the received J1 byte. l J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) - Disable l l l C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped. If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm. 0x0A). ----End Parameters Parameter J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode. (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization. It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping. set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE. 12-9 . set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE. (0xFC) Reserved. That is. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame. 12-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. (0xCF) Reserved. 12. (0xFE)O. Ltd. (0x1B)GFP Mapping. (0xFF)VC-AIS Default Value Description If the local NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm. Procedure Step 1 Select the E1 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose. you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. Step 2 Optional: Set the J2 byte. set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.. 181 Test Signal. (0xE1) Reserved. (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping. when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm. The corresponding E1 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter C2 to Be Received Value Range (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping. If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm. the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. 6. Double-click the parameter to be modified. a prompt box is displayed. ----End Parameters Parameter J2 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Byte]HuaWei SBS Description l Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). Click the Trace Byte J2 tab. 1. a prompt box is displayed. l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. 3. Click Apply. 12-11 . Set the overhead byte. Then. Then. 2. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Step 3 Optional: Set the signal flag. Click Apply. Set the signal flag in the V5 byte.. Click OK.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 12 Configuring Overhead Bytes 1. Ltd. Click OK. 4. Click OK. 3. 2. 5. set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE. 4. Click the Signal Flag tab. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 12-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. (0x02) Asynchronous. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd. (0x01) Equipped-NonSpecific Payload. (0x07)VC_AIS (0x02) Asynchronous If the remote NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm. 0x0A). It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be received at the remote NE. If the local NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.181 Test Signal. (0x04)Byte Synchronization. (0x05)Retained Signal Flag.12 Configuring Overhead Bytes OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Parameter J2 to Be Received ([Mode]Content) Value Range - Default Value Disable Description l Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically). (0x03)Bit Synchronization.. and disable mode. 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D. l l V5 to Be Transmitted V5 to Be Received (0x00)Unequipped or SupervisoryUnequipped. When this parameter is set to Disable Mode. set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE. (0x06) O. the board does not detect the received J2 byte. Ltd. 13..1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services) The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for configuring the NE attributes. 13. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. clock.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet services. you need to add certain configuration and modify certain configuration data according to the actual requirements.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data 13 About This Chapter Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data During the equipment commissioning and operating phases. services. and orderwire. 13-1 . radio link. if the NE ID is the same as another NE ID. and orderwire.13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13. Ltd. all the icons of the NEs that need to be managed must be created on the Main Topology.. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . for example. services. NE Attributes Table 13-1 Task collection (NE attributes) Task Creating NEs Application Scenario To implement the centralized management of NEs by using the NMS. l Modifying the NE ID You need to modify an NE ID. radio link. Configuration Operation Creating an NE (searching for the NE) or Creating an NE manually Remarks l Generally. if the NE ID does not meet the network planning requirements. Modifying the NE ID - Modifying the IP address of an NE Modifying the IP address of an NE - Radio Link CAUTION When you add or modify the configurations of a radio link. you need to modify the configurations of the NE that is located far from the NMS server and then modify the configurations of the NE that is located near to the NMS server. You need to modify the IP address of the gateway NE if changes occur in the external DCN between the NMS server and the gateway NE. NEs are created by searching for the NE on the NMS. The manual NE creation method is applicable only when several NEs need to be created on a large microwave network.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services) The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for configuring the NE attributes. 13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. clock. you can upgrade the 1+0 radio link to a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radio link. Deleting the crossconnections of services Remarks l Before you change the radio work mode. To improve the reliability of a 1+0 radio link. you need to delete all the services on the IF ports.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data Table 13-2 Task collection (radio link) Task Changing the radio work mode of the SDH/PDH radio link Application Scenario You need to modify the radio work mode of an SDH/PDH radio link.Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link Ensure that Actual TX Status of the standby ODU is unmute.. Ltd. Configuring the ATPC function Changing the transmit power Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link - Upgrading a 1+0 radio link to a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radio link 1. l Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the case of a 1+1 FD radio link. If the IF ports are configured with relevant protection.Configuring IF 1+1 protection In the case of IF 1+1 protection. the existing IF board functions as the main IF board. You can change the transmit power if the fading margin is insufficient but the transmit power can still be increased. you need to set Transmission Frequency. 13-3 . l 2. Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link Before you change a radio work mode. - Configuring the ATPC function The ATPC function needs to be enabled for the radio link or the values of ATPC parameters need to be changed. Configuration Operation 1. you need to delete the protection first. it is recommended that you consult the network planning department to check whether the radio link supports the new radio work mode. if the SDH/PDH radio link does not meet the service capacity requirements. T/R Spacing. Configuring IF 1+1 protection does not interrupt services. and Transmit Power for the standby ODU. l 2. Configuration Operation Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute Remarks l Before you modify the Hybrid/AM attribute. however. Ltd. if the modulation mode of the assured AM capacity needs to be changed to increase the assured capacity. for example. l l 13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. it is recommended that you consult the network planning department to check whether the radio link supports the new modulation mode of the assured AM capacity and modulation mode of the full AM capacity. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . To change E1 Capacity of the Hybrid Network. you need to modify the Hybrid/AM attribute. Changing the Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity or Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity does not interrupt services. you need to delete all the E1 services on the IF ports.13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Task Setting the Hybrid/ AM attribute Application Scenario If the Hybrid/AM attribute of the existing Hybrid radio link does not meet the service requirements. Configuring ring MSP does not interrupt the existing services. If the services that are added on the SDH/PDH IF boards exceed the maximum access capacity supported by the Hybrid microwave. you need to apply for the corresponding license. the existing line port functions as the working port. Deleting the crossconnections of services - Upgrading an unprotected chain to a linear MSP chain Configuring linear MSP In the case of linear MSP. you need to change the Hybrid/AM attribute. you need to change the radio work mode. In the case of ring MSP. You can upgrade an unprotected chain to a linear MSP chain to improve the service reliability. If the services that are added on the SDH/PDH IF boards exceed the maximum capacity supported by the radio work mode. Configuring ring MSP Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l Deleting SDH/ PDH services If the line resources are insufficient. you need to delete the SDH/PDH services that are not used to release the corresponding resources. Configuration Operation Creating the crossconnections of point-to-point services or creating the crossconnections of SNCP services Remarks l If the services that need to be added on the IF boards require the support of a license.. Ltd. the existing line port functions as the working port. 13-5 . Configuring linear MSP does not interrupt the existing services. Upgrading an unprotected ring to a two-fiber MSP ring You can upgrade an unprotected ring to a twofiber MSP ring to improve the service reliability.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data Services Table 13-3 Task collection (services) Task Adding SDH/PDH services Application Scenario More SDH/PDH services need to be accessed on the network. all the NEs on the transport network trace the same clock. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Hence. configure the clock source for each NE according to the clock synchronization scheme. Configuration Operation Converting normal services to SNCP services Remarks Only the normal services in the receive direction are converted to SNCP services. the requirements can be met after the SSM protocol is configured. If the transport network is a ring network or a network with a more complex topology. configure the SSM or extended SSM protocol according to the requirements. Ltd.13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Task Upgrading normal services to SNCP services Application Scenario You can upgrade normal services to SNCP services to improve the service reliability. you need to configure the unidirectional crossconnections from the SNCP services to the working trail and from the SNCP services to the protection trail so that the normal services both in the receive direction and in the transmission direction are converted to SNCP services. Configuring protection for the clock source Configuring protection for the clock source 13-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Configuration Operation Configuring the clock source Remarks The clock sources must comply with the networkwide clock synchronization scheme. Clock Table 13-4 Task collection (clock) Task Configuring the clock source Application Scenario When the centralized management of the OptiX RTN NEs is implemented by using the NMS.. Generally. Hence. Each orderwire phone number must be unique and cannot be set to "888". configure the orderwire for the NEs. 13-7 . Ltd. Ethernet Services Transmitted on the SDH Microwave Table 13-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave) Task Creating Ethernet services Application Scenario Create the Ethernet services according to the service planning. Configuration Operation Configuring SDH/PDH microwavebased Ethernet services on a per-NE basis Remarks - Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data Orderwire Table 13-5 Task collection (orderwire) Task Configuring the orderwire Application Scenario After the centralized management of the OptiX RTN NEs is implemented by using the NMS.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet services. It is recommended that you allocate the three-digit numbers (that start from "101") as the orderwire phone numbers for the NEs one after another. Configuration Operation Configuring the orderwire Remarks l The orderwire phone numbers of all the NEs on the network must of the same length. l 13. It is recommended that the orderwire phone numbers are three-digit numbers. according to the order of NE IDs. Increasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically Deleting Ethernet services You can delete the Ethernet services that are not used to release the corresponding resources. Delete the crossconnections of the timeslots in the VCTRUNK that are released in Step 2.Increasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically If the VCTRUNK bandwidth cannot be used or less VCTRUNK bandwidth can be used after the services are deleted. delete partial or all timeslots contained in the VCTRUNK.13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Task Increasing the line bandwidth of the Ethernet services Application Scenario You need to increase the line bandwidth for Ethernet services. Configuration Operation 1. adding the idle timeslots does not interrupt the Ethernet services. 3. 1. - 2. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .Deleting the cross-connections of Ethernet services 13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. if the Ethernet traffic volume is increased.Deleting Ethernet private line services or deleting Ethernet LAN services 2. to release the corresponding line resources. Only the idle timeslots that can be added to the VCTRUNKs occupied by the Ethernet services can be crossconnected to the line timeslots. If the LCAS function is enabled for the VCTRUNK..Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Remarks Create the crossconnections from the idle timeslots of the Ethernet board to the line timeslots. Add the selected idle timeslots of the Ethernet board to the VCTRUNK. 1. to release the corresponding line resources. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Delete partial timeslots contained in the VCTRUNK. set Enabled/Disabled to Disabled for the Ethernet port. Delete the crossconnections of the timeslots in the VCTRUNK that are released in Step 2.. You can delete the Ethernet services that are not used to release the corresponding resources. Configuring SDH/PDH microwave-based Ethernet services on a per-NE basis 1.Changing the values of CAR parameters or changing the values of CoS parameters Remarks - - Change the values of QoS parameters to ensure that the QoS control adapts to the service adjustments.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) 13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data Task Application Scenario Configuration Operation 4.Configuring the external ports of Ethernet boards Remarks If the Ethernet port cannot be used after the services are deleted. Configuration Operation 1.Deleting the cross-connections of Ethernet services Ethernet Services Transmitted on the Hybrid Microwave Table 13-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave) Task Creating Ethernet services Delete the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board. 13-9 . Application Scenario Create the Ethernet services according to the service planning.Decreasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically 2. you can decrease the line bandwidth occupied by the Ethernet services to release the corresponding line resources. Decreasing the line bandwidth of the Ethernet services If the Ethernet traffic volume is decreased.Deleting Ethernet private line services or deleting Ethernet LAN services 2. thus preventing the alarms related to the port from being reported. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .Changing the values of CAR parameters or changing the values of CoS parameters Remarks Change the values of QoS parameters to ensure that the QoS controls the situation of the change. or Ethernet capacity supported by the Hybrid microwave is changed..13 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Task Adjusting the QoS Application Scenario You need to adjust the QoS if the service type. Ltd. Configuration Operation 1. 13-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. traffic volume. thus doubling the link capacity. A-1 .. H Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. F FD Frequency Diversity. Ltd. A ACAP ATPC AM Glossary The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal polarizations between two adjacent communication channels. Two or more microwave frequencies with certain frequency space are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. C CCDP The co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) operation provides two parallel communication channels over the same link with orthogonal polarizations.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) A Glossary A Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. E ETH-OAM Being in compliance with the MAC-layer protocol. A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the transmit signal detected at the receiver. Refers to the adaptive modulation (AM) technology that implements automatic adjustment of the coding scheme and modulation scheme. the ETH-OAM function checks the Ethernet link by transmitting the OAM protocol packet. Automatic Transmit Power Control. multiplexing/ demultiplexing. A solution features flexible bandwidth and dynamic adjustment. Ltd. The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two MST functions. The Protocol is used by IPv4 systems (hosts and routers) to report their IP multicast group memberships to any neighboring multicast routers. O ODU QoS Outdoor Unit. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s.. N N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and one protection channel. it provides a failure tolerance mechanism. Indicates the quality of Ethernet services. IGMP Snooping is the process of listening to IGMP traffic. A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Internet Group Management Protocol. IGMP Snooping L LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . 140 Mbit/s and 565 Mbit/s rates. In addition. M MSP Multiplex section protection. from a "working" to a "protection" channel. and IF processing for services. The indoor unit implements accessing. as implied by the name. IGMP snooping. The outdoor unit implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.A Glossary OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) Hybrid microwave Refers to the microwave system that can transmit mixed E1 and Ethernet services. never changes the feature of the E1 and Ethernet services in transmission. A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. P PDH Plesiosynchronous Digital Hierarchy. 34 Mbit/s. I IDU IGMP Indoor Unit. is a feature that allows the switch to "listen in" on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers by processing the layer 3 IGMP packets sent in a multicast network. which enhances the viability of virtual concatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting). 1D.. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Subnetwork connection protection. A-3 . the T2000 is located between the NE level and network level. defined in the IEEE Standard 802. The protocol is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol. is an OSI layer-2 protocol that ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. Ltd. only receive SD is used. which can supports all NE level functions and part of the network level management functions. In the telecommunication management network architecture. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. R RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. Currently. allows for individual VLANs with extra tag information to traverse the backbone networks and thus provides Layer 2 VPN tunnels for users. or if its performance falls below a required level. S SD Space Diversity. providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Two or more antennas separated by a specific distance transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails. standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) A Glossary Q QinQ The QinQ.1Q encapsulation. a Layer 2 tunnel protocol developed based on the IEEE 802. SDH SNCP STP T T2000 A subnet management system (SNMS). . . Ltd. Adaptive Modulation Automatic Protection Switching Address Resolution Protocol Automatic Transmit Power Control Administrative Unit B BER BIP BPDU Bit Error Rate Bit-Interleaved Parity Bridge Protocol Data Unit C CAR CBS CCDP CGMP CIR CLNP CLNS CoS CPU Committed Access Rate Committed Burst Size Co-Channel Dual Polarization Cisco Group Management Protocol committed information rate connectionless network protocol Connectionless Network Service Class of Service Central Processing Unit Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) B Acronyms and Abbreviations B A AM APS ARP ATPC AU Acronyms and Abbreviations Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order. B-1 . Issue 02 (2009-06-15) . Ltd..B Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) CRC CVLAN C-VLAN cyclic redundancy check Customer VLAN Customer VLAN D DC DCC DCN DSCP DVMRP Direct Current Data Communications Channel Data Communication Network differentiated services code point Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol E ECC EPL EPLAN ES-IS EVPL Embedded Control Channel Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN End System to Intermediate System Ethernet Virtual Private Line F FCS FD FE FIFO FLP FTP Frame Check Sequence Frequency Diversity Fast Ethernet First In First Out Fast Link Pulse file transfer protocol G GE GFP GTS GUI Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure Generic Traffic Shaping Graphical User Interface B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. B-3 . Ltd..Telecommunication Standardization Sector Independence VLAN learning L LAN LAPD LAPS LCAS LCT LMSP Local Area Network Link Access Procedure on the D channel Link Access Procedure-SDH Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Generation-Local Craft Terminal Linear Multiplex Section Protection M MAC MBS MDI MIB Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Medium Access Control Maximum Burst Size Medium Dependent Interface Management Information Base Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) B Acronyms and Abbreviations H HDLC HSB HSM High level Data Link Control procedure Hot Standby Hitless Switch Mode I ICMP IDU IEEE IETF IF IGMP IP IPv6 IS-IS ISO ITU-T IVL Internet Control Message Protocol Indoor Unit Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers The Internet Engineering Task Force Intermediate Frequency Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol Internet Protocol version 6 Intermediate System to Intermediate System International Standard Organization International Telecommunication Union . .1Q in 802. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .1Q Quality of Service R RF RFC RIP RMON RSL radio frequency Request For Comment Routing Information Protocol Remote Monitoring Received Signal Level B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.B Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) MPLS MSP MTU multiprotocol label switching Multiplex Section Protection Maximum Transmission Unit N NE NLP NMS NNI NSAP Network Element Normal Link Pulse Network Management System Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface Network Service Access Point O ODU OSI OSPF Outdoor Unit Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First P PDH PIM-DM PIM-SM PPP Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode Point-to-Point Protocol Q QinQ QoS 802. . Ltd. B-5 .OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) B Acronyms and Abbreviations RSTP RTN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Radio Transmission Node S SD SDH SNC SNCP SNMP SNR STM STM-1 STM-1e STM-1o STM-4 STM-N STP SVL Space Diversity Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SubNetwork Connection Sub-Network Connection Protection Simple Network Management Protocol Signal-to-Noise Ratio Synchronous Transport Module SDH Transport Module -1 STM-1 Electrical Interface STM-1 Optical Interface SDH Transport Module -4 SDH Transport Module -N Spanning Tree Protocol Shared VLAN Learning T TCI TCP TU Tag Control Information Transfer Control Protocol Tributary Unit U UDP UNI User Datagram Protocol user-network interface V VC VC12 VC-12 Virtual Container Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -12 Issue 02 (2009-06-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 02 (2009-06-15) .B Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (T2000) VC3 VC-3 VC4 VC-4 VCG VLAN VoIP VPN Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Concatenation Group Virtual LAN Voice over IP Virtual Private Network W WAN WRR WTR Wide Area Network Weighted Round Robin Wait to Restore Time X XPD XPIC Cross-Polarization Discrimination Cross-polarization interference cancellation B-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..